Error 504 clamp up mimaki

Доброго всем дня, датчик не обнаруживает носитель выходит "Error 50". В инструкции это значит что- Датчик не обнаруживает носитель (носител..

Rahman

Mimaki JV33-160 Датчик не видит носителя (Error 50)

Доброго всем дня, датчик не обнаруживает носитель

выходит «Error 50». В инструкции это значит что- Датчик не обнаруживает носитель

(носитель установлен неправильно либо установлен носитель недо-пустимого типа).

В чем может быть проблемка? Бумаги те же что и раньше. Помогите кто чем может.



Sokell

Старожил
Старожил
Сообщения: 6703
Зарегистрирован: 20 июл 2010 13:33
Последний визит: 08 фев 2023 09:52
Изменить репутацию:
Репутация:
Голосов: 165
Откуда: Рязань

Сообщение Sokell » 07 фев 2014 14:08

Rahman

Внизу под «носителем» есть, утопленная в канавке черная «полоска» по ширине всего стала…

Убедитесь что она есть, не повреждена… Протрите ее… И убедитесь что датчик с левой стороны головы (не красный световой) подключен и не выскочил с своей позиции…

Спаси меня господь от тех кому я верю,
от тех кому не – верю уберегусь я сам


Аватара пользователя


@natol

Завсегдатай
Завсегдатай
Сообщения: 515
Зарегистрирован: 20 окт 2011 17:27
Последний визит: 09 дек 2022 10:21
Изменить репутацию:
Репутация:
Голосов: 17
Откуда: Воронеж

Сообщение @natol » 07 фев 2014 15:18

В Mimaki есть тестовый режим, там можно откалибровать датчик.



Александр Яковлевич

Активный участник
Активный участник
Сообщения: 467
Зарегистрирован: 20 мар 2009 10:46
Последний визит: 04 авг 2022 16:14
Изменить репутацию:
Репутация:
Голосов: 17
Откуда: Москва

Сообщение Александр Яковлевич » 08 фев 2014 21:38

Rahman

Протри датчик спиртом (или в крайнем случае водкой) — должно помочь. Ну и край материала не должен быть очень близко к краю стола.

Тщательней надо, братцы, тщательней…, но без фанатизма!



vovka.ru

Участник
Участник
Сообщения: 99
Зарегистрирован: 10 дек 2012 15:13
Последний визит: 12 июл 2020 20:46
Изменить репутацию:
Репутация:
Голосов: 2
Откуда: Ярославль

Сообщение vovka.ru » 09 фев 2014 22:24

Александр Яковлевич верно написал У него глазок забило протри его только не водкой а изопропиловым спиртом



Goodymaster_1

Завсегдатай
Завсегдатай
Сообщения: 699
Зарегистрирован: 21 ноя 2013 23:03
Последний визит: 11 сен 2022 20:38
Изменить репутацию:
Репутация:
Голосов: 15
Откуда: Москва

Сообщение Goodymaster_1 » 10 фев 2014 12:29

Еще бывает темно в помещении :) Можно фонариком подсветить в место замера.


Аватара пользователя


Немец

Старожил
Старожил
Сообщения: 1732
Зарегистрирован: 24 фев 2010 13:22
Последний визит: 21 ноя 2022 16:30
Изменить репутацию:
Репутация:
Голосов: 40
Откуда: Волга

Сообщение Немец » 10 фев 2014 13:32

Rahman

Помогла ли вам помощь печатного сообщества ?

(в нашем случае пришлось когда то менять датчик)



Вернуться в «Принтеры MIMAKI»

Кто сейчас на конференции

Сейчас этот форум просматривают: нет зарегистрированных пользователей и 1 гость

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

When an error message is displayed, eliminate the error according to the chart below.

If the same error message appears again, contact your dealer or an office of MIMAKI to call for service.

Message

ERROR 122

CHECK:SDRAM

ERROR 128

HDC FIFO OVER

ERROR 128

HDC FIFO UNDER

ERROR 129

BATTERY EXCHANGE

ERROR 130

HD DATA SEQ

ERROR 146

E-LOG SEQ

ERROR 151

Main PCB V1R2

ERROR 152

Main PCB V2R5

ERROR 153

Main PCB V3R3

ERROR 154

Main PCB V05

ERROR 157

Main PCB VTT

ERROR 16e

Main PCB V3R3B

ERROR 15f

HEAD DRIVE HOT

ERROR 171

NEW HEAD CONNECT

ERROR 186

HDC OVERFLOW

ERROR 186

HDC UNDERFLOW

ERROR 187

HDC SLEW RATE

ERROR 188

HDC MEMORY

ERROR 18a

Main PCB V_CORE

6-8

Cause

SDRAM is defective.

Head control circuit board is defective.

The battery life end of the internal clock

is detected.

Head data transferring sequence error

occurred.

Sequential number abnormality of the

event log occurred.

An error occurred in the main PCB .

COM driver becomes the high tempera-

ture.

New Print Head was recognized.

An error is detected on the waveform

printed on.

An error occurred in the main PCB .

Solution

• Turn off the power to the machine and turn it

on after a while.

• If the same error message appears again,

contact your local distributor to call for ser-

vice.

• Contact your local distributor to call for ser-

vice.

• Turn off the power to the machine and turn it

on after a while.

• If the same error message appears again,

contact your local distributor to call for ser-

vice.

Mimaki SWJ 320 -S4 — Проблема с шагом.

Mimaki SWJ 320 -S4 — Проблема с шагом.

Сообщение Granovskiy » 06 дек 2013 22:56

Имеется у нас в наличии 2 плоттера фирмы mimaki, jv33-160 и недавно приобрели Mimaki SWJ-S4. Так вот если на jv33 с шагом все просто, будь то рулон пленки 100,126,160 см. заправленный в станок или огрызок найденный в коробке с отходами, шаг постоянно одинаковый. А вот на SWJ-320, почему-то разный шаг на каждую ширину материала, будь то пленка или баннер. А про печать цвето пробы на огрызке, я вообще молчу ! Так например шаг на пленке шириной 100см равен нулю, а на 126см уже ша (МИНУС 215), на 160см. -535.

Подскажите пожалуйста, это нормально ? Или может мы материал как-то не правильно заправляем, а или секрет какой есть ))) С баннером такая же проблема.

Сообщение Алексей Береговой » 09 дек 2013 17:11

Granovskiy
Попробуйте обратиться к поставщику этого принтера.
Так же посмотрите на ссылочку: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AziSc40DDqg
Еще одно примечание — рулоны нужно позиционировать строго по центру зоны печати.

Добавлено спустя 4 минуты 1 секунду:

На JV33 на разных материалах шаг тоже разный. Просто это не сильно заметно

Сообщение kireyev » 11 дек 2013 13:43

Шаг — это имеется ввиду «коррекция скорости подачи носителя» (по англ. MEDIA COMP.)?

Если да, то в режиме LOCAL.X(1,2,3,4) заходите MENU->FUNCTION->SETUP->MEDIA COMP и там выставляете 0 (чтобы пропустить тестовую печать нажмите стрелку вправо). Далее делаете тестовый принт и регулируете на текущий материал.

Правда я скорее всего не правильно понял про шаг, так как у Вас уже 2 мимаки и про такую регулировку Вы наверное знаете.

Сообщение uosega » 08 янв 2014 14:32

Сообщение Евгений Жариков » 28 янв 2014 15:21

Источник

Mimaki SWJ 320 -S4 — Проблема с шагом.

Mimaki SWJ 320 -S4 — Проблема с шагом.

Сообщение Granovskiy » 06 дек 2013 22:56

Имеется у нас в наличии 2 плоттера фирмы mimaki, jv33-160 и недавно приобрели Mimaki SWJ-S4. Так вот если на jv33 с шагом все просто, будь то рулон пленки 100,126,160 см. заправленный в станок или огрызок найденный в коробке с отходами, шаг постоянно одинаковый. А вот на SWJ-320, почему-то разный шаг на каждую ширину материала, будь то пленка или баннер. А про печать цвето пробы на огрызке, я вообще молчу ! Так например шаг на пленке шириной 100см равен нулю, а на 126см уже ша (МИНУС 215), на 160см. -535.

Подскажите пожалуйста, это нормально ? Или может мы материал как-то не правильно заправляем, а или секрет какой есть ))) С баннером такая же проблема.

Сообщение Алексей Береговой » 09 дек 2013 17:11

Granovskiy
Попробуйте обратиться к поставщику этого принтера.
Так же посмотрите на ссылочку: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AziSc40DDqg
Еще одно примечание — рулоны нужно позиционировать строго по центру зоны печати.

Добавлено спустя 4 минуты 1 секунду:

На JV33 на разных материалах шаг тоже разный. Просто это не сильно заметно

Сообщение kireyev » 11 дек 2013 13:43

Шаг — это имеется ввиду «коррекция скорости подачи носителя» (по англ. MEDIA COMP.)?

Если да, то в режиме LOCAL.X(1,2,3,4) заходите MENU->FUNCTION->SETUP->MEDIA COMP и там выставляете 0 (чтобы пропустить тестовую печать нажмите стрелку вправо). Далее делаете тестовый принт и регулируете на текущий материал.

Правда я скорее всего не правильно понял про шаг, так как у Вас уже 2 мимаки и про такую регулировку Вы наверное знаете.

Сообщение uosega » 08 янв 2014 14:32

Сообщение Евгений Жариков » 28 янв 2014 15:21

Источник

Clamp up mimaki error 504

Answer: This error is displayed when the obstacle sensor detects an obstacle that can collide with the head.

Check that the setting value of “MEDIA THICKNESS” or “HEAD GAP” is appropriate against the actual thickness of the media. In addition, check on the followings.

・Dust or garbage is not sticking to the surface of table or media
・When the media is fixed with tape, the tape is not lifted
・The media is not rolled back

1. Required action against “ERROR505 !WORK High”

(1) Press the [ENTER] key while the error is displayed. The machine returns to mode.

(2) If [DATA REMAIN] is displayed, press the [DATACLEAR] key and then press the [ENTER] key.

(3) Press the [FUNCTION] key, and then press the [WORK SET] -> [ENTER] key. The Y bar moves backward, and the table moves down to the lowest point.

(4) Reset the media.

(5) Press the [REMOTE] key. The Y bar moves from the backside to the front when the machine enters mode. It is possible to start printing if no error is displayed until the Y bar stops at the front.

* Note that the head gap may be wider than the setting value even though it is set to 1.5mm in [Head Gap], if the value in [MEDIA THICKNESS] is larger than the thickness of the actual media.

2. Difference in action by setting
[FUNCTION] -> [HEAD HEIGHT] -> [GAP CHECK] is added to UJF-3042 firmware version 1.30. UJF-3042FX and UJF-3042HG have the [GAP CHECK] function regardless of firmware version.

・[GAP CHECK] is set as [OFF]:
When the obstacle sensor reacts, “ERROR505! WORK High” is displayed and the operation stops.

・[GAP CHECK] is set as [ON]:
When the obstacle sensor reacts, “ERROR505! WORK High” is not displayed, and the table moves down to the point that the obstacle sensor does not react.

* Because the table continues to move down until the obstacle sensor does not react even though [HEAD GAP] is set to 1.5mm, the actual head gap may not be 1.5mm. Note that movement of the head gap may cause a degraded drawing quality or ink mist if the obstacle sensor reacts during printing.

If the problem still remains, please contact us.

Источник

Что означает ошибка сервера 504 Gateway Time Out и как ее исправить

Иногда при посещении отдельных страниц сайта мы сталкиваемся с тем, что на экране вместо желаемого контента появляется сообщение об ошибке с цифровым кодом. Для «непосвященного» пользователя это просто набор цифр, но на самом деле в этих цифрах заложена определенная информация. Все они группируются по видам причин возникновения сбоя.

Сообщения, кодирующиеся в формате 5хх, говорят о проблеме на стороне сервера, например, когда невозможно выполнить запрос из-за нарушения связи между несколькими серверами. Ошибка 504 Gateway Time Out не является распространенной, но это не значит, что на нее не стоит обращать внимания, особенно владельцу сайта. Рассмотрим некоторые причины возникновения данной ошибки и способы ее устранения как на стороне обычного посетителя, так и администратором веб-ресурса.

Ошибка 504 Gateway Time Out – это код состояния HTTP, который появляется, когда в течение заданного периода времени один сервер не получает своевременный ответ от другого сервера, который действует как шлюз или прокси.

Описания ошибки могут иметь различную форму:

  • 504 Gateway Timeout nginx
  • Gateway Timeout Error
  • HTTP Error 504
  • 504 Gateway Time-out – The server didn’t respond in time
  • HTTP Error 504 – Gateway Timeout

Наличие дополнительного словесного описания помогает конкретизировать причину возникновения сбоя.

Производительный хостинг в подарок при заказе лицензии 1С-Битрикс

Выбирайте надежную CMS с регулярными обновлениями системы и профессиональной поддержкой. А мы подарим вам год хостинга – специально для сайтов на 1С-Битрикс.

Что делать посетителю сайта при возникновении ошибки 504

Итак, вы столкнулись с появлением на экране сообщения «error 504». Не спешите уходить с сайта, ведь возникновение сбоя может говорить о неправильной работе вашего браузера или даже наличии более серьезных проблем на уровне пользовательского софта. Попробуйте произвести довольно простые действия, чтобы убедиться, что с вашим программным обеспечением и настройками все в порядке.

  1. Перезагрузите проблемную страницу или текущий браузер. Если проблема устранилась и не повторяется вновь, особенно при посещении других сайтов, о ней можно просто забыть. При регулярном возникновении однотипных ошибок во время посещения разных ресурсов стоит покопаться в настройках собственного ПО поглубже.
  2. Зайдите на тот же самый сайт, где возникла ошибка сервера 504, используя альтернативный браузер. В случае, когда страница во время тестирования открылась корректно, обновите браузер, в котором случился сбой, до последней версии.
  3. Проверьте, как открываются страницы этого же сайта с другого компьютера или смартфона. Это позволит вам понять, не связано ли появление ошибки 504 с ПО конкретного устройства.
  4. При регулярном появлении HTTP ошибок, в т.ч. с кодом 504, очистите кэш браузера, удалите файлы cookies. Со временем в любом браузере накапливается много «мусора». Произведя очистку, вы поможете программе работать более корректно и даже быстрее.
  5. Произведите сброс настроек роутера или модема, отключив оборудование на некоторое время от сети. Данная операция вряд ли приведет к устранению ошибки 504, но может улучшить качество интернет-соединения. Провайдеры регулярно вносят изменения в настройки собственного софта, обновляют его. Иногда это приводит к конфликту в корректном взаимодействии пользовательского оборудования и серверов оператора. Перезагрузка устройства по питанию в большинстве случаев решает такие проблемы.
  6. Очистите кэш DNS. Данная операция кажется сложной для обычного пользователя, но на деле выполнить ее достаточно легко. Способ очистки зависит от вашей операционной системы, найдите соответствующий мануал в интернете.
  7. Для опытных пользователей подойдет рекомендация временно переключить DNS-сервер на Google Public DNS , что как минимум поможет определить, возник ли ошибочный код состояния HTTP по причине DNS проблемы.

Если после проведения всех вышеозначенных рекомендаций любая ошибка, в т.ч. 504 Gateway Time Out, продолжает возникать регулярно, обратитесь в техподдержку проблемного интернет-ресурса.

Решение проблем с появлением ошибки сервера 504 администратором веб-ресурса

Некорректная работа сайта чаще всего просто раздражает посетителя и приводит к тому, что пользователь находит альтернативный ресурс. Для владельца сайта такие сбои могут носить более глобальные последствия. Поэтому очень важно своевременно обнаруживать баги и максимально быстро устранять их. Для раннего мониторинга стоит использовать все возможные инструменты:

  • проводить регулярную симуляцию пользовательского поведения на сайте;
  • настроить автоматизированный мониторинг работоспособности ресурса как встроенными инструментами администрирования, так и с использованием специальных скриптов;
  • обеспечить качественную работу службы технической поддержки сайта, своевременную обработку всех поступающих сообщений, особенно связанных с информацией о появлении разного рода ошибок на стороне пользователя.

Соблюдение последнего правила не только позволит практически без дополнительных затрат отслеживать все возможные проблемы, которые возникают при посещении сайта. Своевременная обработка пользовательских запросов, быстрый ответ, выдача рекомендаций и публичное обсуждение повышают лояльность и создают дополнительный PR-эффект.

Почти все ошибки с кодом 5хх, возникающие из-за невозможности обработки определенного количества запросов, поступающих на сервер, решаются методом апгрейда железа (использованием высокопроизводительного хостинга) либо оптимизацией работы программного обеспечения. Второй способ зависит от вида движка, на котором создан конкретный сайт. При использовании условно-бесплатных программ (WordPress, OpeneCart и других) все проблемы придется решать на уровне администрирования, с привлечением конкретного веб-программиста, разработавшего данный сайт. Если баги возникают на платных платформах (1С-Битрикс, UMI.CMS, NetCat CMS), напишите об ошибке 504 Gateway Time Out в техподдержку разработчика. Отправить сообщение о проблеме следует и разработчикам платных скриптов, если они установлены на вашем сайте, и вы считаете, что сбои возникают по причине их некорректного исполнения.

Вот некоторые причины, приводящие к возникновению ошибки 504 Gateway Time Out

  • Резкий скачок нагрузки на сайт вследствие поступления большого количества внешних запросов, вызванного DDoS-атаками или действиями вирусного ПО, пиковым посещением сайта, например, в момент проведения различных акций в интернет-магазине, или единовременной загрузкой на сайт большого объема контента (импорт информации из CSV- или XML-файлов).
  • Некорректная работа скриптов, плагинов и дополнений, конфликтующих как между собой, так и внутри.
  • Превышение лимита доступных ресурсов при использовании виртуального хостинга.

Еще одна возможная причина возникновения ошибки 504 – исполняемый скрипт не укладывается в отведенный лимит времени. Это бывает, когда скрипт обращается к другим сайтам либо просто выполняет тяжелую операцию, например, строит поисковый индекс.

Рекомендации по устранению ошибки 504 Gateway Time Out методами администрирования сайта

Ошибка 504 Gateway Time Out может быть вызвана недавними изменениями или обновлениями на сайте. Если после отката к состоянию, предшествующему изменениям, баг исчез, следует найти конкретное действие, повлекшее возникновение ошибки. Для этого необходимо проверить журнал ошибок соответствующей CMS. Пользователи WordPress могут включить журналирование ошибок в файле wp-config.php добавлением следующих строк:

Все возникающие варианты ошибок будут записаны в файле wp-contents/debug.log.

Для проверки работоспособности плагинов и расширений попробуйте отключить те, которые вызывают подозрение как источники возникновения ошибки 504. В первую очередь это касается устаревших скриптов, но причиной могут оказаться и обновления. Если проблема исчезла, далее следует найти некорректный плагин или дополнение и устранить или исправить его. Один из способов улучшения работы исполняемого скрипта – увеличить значение параметра PHP max_execution_time или облегчить скрипт.

При использовании CDN для более быстрого получения контента, в частности CloudFlare, который работает как CDN и как сервис предотвращения негативных последствий от DDoS, вы можете столкнуться с двумя типами ошибок 504. В случае возникновения проблемы на стороне CloudFlare лучшим решением будет связаться с поддержкой CloudFlare или отключить его. Второй вариант – когда сбой возникает на стороне хостинг-провайдера. В этой ситуации также необходимо обратиться в службу поддержки хостера.

Часто ошибку 504 можно видеть на серверах, где используется VPS-хостинг и установлен Nginx в качестве фронтенда и Apache в качестве бэкенда. Для устранения проблемы в Apache можно увеличить значение timeout по умолчанию в файле httpd.conf:

Также увеличить лимит в max_execution_time в php.ini:

После внесения изменений следует перезапустить Apache. Ошибка 504 Gateway Time Out должна исчезнуть.

Аналогичным образом проблема с появлением ошибки HTTP 504 решается пользователями Nginx. Попробуйте увеличить такие параметры в файле /etc/nginx/conf.d/timeout.conf:

Также рекомендуется увеличить max_execution_time в php.ini:

Далее перезапустите Nginx и откройте сайт.

Более простым решением устранения данной проблемы является использование панели управления сервером.

Данный способ позволяет администрировать настройки веб-сервера без использования консоли, один раз настроить их под ваш проект и больше не подключаться к серверу без острой необходимости.

Например, в бесплатной панели управления Vesta Control Panel достаточно внести изменения в раздел «Сервер» и навсегда забыть о возможности возникновения ошибок на сайте.

И далее внести соответствующие изменения.

Аналогичным способом проблема устраняется и при использовании альтернативных панелей управления хостингом – Ajenti, CentOS Web Panel, ISPmanager и других.

Если вы считаете, что появление 504 Gateway Timeout вызвано превышением лимита использования ресурсов серверного железа, оптимальным решением будет аренда выделенного сервера или VPS. Когда ваш сайт уже размещен на виртуальном хостинге, но ни одна из рекомендаций не привела к исправлению error 504, обратитесь к хостинг-провайдеру. В этом случае подробно опишите причины, которые, как вы полагаете, привели к появлению сбоя.

Заключение

В данной статье мы рассмотрели основные причины возникновения ошибки HTTP 504 Gateway Timeout и популярные способы устранения неполадки. Уверен, некоторые администраторы веб-ресурсов сталкивались с подобными проблемами, выходящими за рамки приведенных примеров и рекомендаций.

Буду благодарен, если вы поделитесь своим опытом в комментариях.

Источник

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
URL: https://mimaki.com/
You can also download the latest manual from our website.
D203176-23
Original instructions
UV INKJET Printer Cutter





i
CAUTION ........................................................................................vi
CAUTION  ............................................................................................ vi
Requests  ............................................................................................. vi
FCC Statement (USA) ......................................................................... vi
Interference to televisions and radios .................................................. vi
Foreword ........................................................................................vii
On This Operation manual  ..................................................................vii
Safety Precautions .........................................................................vii
Symbols ...............................................................................................vii
Safety interlock .................................................................................... xi
Warning labels  ...............................................................................xii
Chapter 1 Before Use
Moving This Machine ..................................................................... 1-2
Where to Install This Machine ...........................................................1-2
Working Environmental Temperature ................................................1-2
Moving This Machine  ........................................................................1-2
Names of Parts and Functions  ...................................................... 1-3
Front Side of the Machine  .................................................................1-3
Rear Side and Right Side of the Machine  .........................................1-4
Carriage .............................................................................................1-5
Operation Panel  ................................................................................1-6
Media Sensor  ....................................................................................1-8
Carriage .............................................................................................1-8
Cutter Blade and Cutting Slot ............................................................1-8
Capping Station .................................................................................1-8
Pinch Rollers and Grit Rollers  ...........................................................1-8
Connecting Cables  ........................................................................1-9
Connecting USB 2.0 Interface Cable  ................................................1-9
Connecting a LAN Cable ...................................................................1-9
Connecting the Power Cable ...........................................................1-10
Ink Bottles .................................................................................... 1-11
Types of Inks You Can Use with the Machine .................................1-11
Precautions on Using the Ink Bottles  ..............................................1-11
Installing the Ink Bottles ............................................................... 1-12
Media ........................................................................................... 1-17
The Size of Media That Can Be Used with This Machine  ...............1-17
Precautions on Handling the Media  ................................................1-17
Menu Mode  ................................................................................. 1-18
Chapter 2 Basic Operations
Printing Procedure ......................................................................... 2-2
Turning the Power On/Off .............................................................. 2-3
Turning the Power On  .......................................................................2-3
Turning the Power Off  .......................................................................2-3
Table of Contents





ii
Setting Media .................................................................................2-4
Adjusting the Head Height .................................................................2-4
Adjusting the Positions of the Pinch Rollers to Suit the Media ..........2-5
Maximum Print/Cut Area  .................................................................2-10
Precautions on Setting the Media  ...................................................2-10
Setting a Roll Media  ........................................................................2-11
Setting the Pinch Roller Pressure  ...................................................2-13
Take-up Device  ...............................................................................2-14
Setting Leaf Media  ..........................................................................2-15
Changing the printing origin  ............................................................2-16
Test Printing .................................................................................2-17
Test Printing  ....................................................................................2-17
Perform test printing with the normal test pattern ............................2-18
Perform test printing with the test pattern for checking white ink  ....2-18
Head Cleaning  .............................................................................2-19
About Head Cleaning  ......................................................................2-19
Perform head cleaning depending on the test printing result  ..........2-19
Setting Media Correction  .............................................................2-19
Setting of Media Correction .............................................................2-19
If the Positions of Dots Shift... ......................................................2-20
Printing Data  ................................................................................2-20
Starting a Printing Operation  ...........................................................2-20
Cancel printing (Data Clear) ............................................................2-21
Cutting Media ...............................................................................2-21
Workflow of cutting  ......................................................................2-22
Installing Tools .............................................................................2-23
When a Cutter Is Used  ....................................................................2-23
How to Install a Ballpoint Pen ..........................................................2-24
Setting the Cutting Conditions  .....................................................2-26
About the Cut Conditions  ................................................................2-26
Select the Tool Condition  ................................................................2-27
Set the Cut Conditions  ....................................................................2-27
Test Cutting  .................................................................................2-28
Cutting Data .................................................................................2-29
Setting the Origin .............................................................................2-29
Start Cutting  ....................................................................................2-29
Stopping a Cutting Operation (Data Clear)  .....................................2-29
Removing the Cutter Unit Temporarily  ............................................2-29
Cutting Media ...............................................................................2-30
Chapter 3 Setup
About SETUP MENU .....................................................................3-2
SETUP MENU table  ..........................................................................3-3
Register the Optimal Print Conditions to Match the Use  ...................3-4
Setting of Media Correction ...............................................................3-5
If the Positions of Dots Shift...  ...........................................................3-6
Setting of Logical Seek ......................................................................3-7
Setting of Overprint  ...........................................................................3-7
Setting of Drying Time .......................................................................3-7
Setting of Left and Right Margins  ......................................................3-8
Setting of Vacuum Fan ......................................................................3-8





iii
Setting of Feed Speed .......................................................................3-8
Setting of MAPS ................................................................................3-9
Setting of Auto Cleaning ....................................................................3-9
Setting of Interval Wiping  ................................................................3-10
Setting of the UV Mode  ...................................................................3-10
Setting Ionizer (option)  ....................................................................3-10
Setting of LT mode ..........................................................................3-11
About MACHINE SETUP MENU  .................................................3-12
MACHINE SETUP MENUs table .....................................................3-13
Setting of AUTO Power-off ..............................................................3-14
Setting of Take-up Unit ....................................................................3-14
Setting of the Display of Media Residual .........................................3-15
Setting of Media Detection  ..............................................................3-15
Setting of a LANGUAGE  .................................................................3-16
Setting of Time  ................................................................................3-16
Setting of Unit (Temperature/ Length) .............................................3-16
Setting of a KEY BUZZER ...............................................................3-16
Setting of the CONFIRM. FEED ......................................................3-17
Setting of the SPACE FEED MODE ................................................3-17
Setting of the Network .....................................................................3-17
Setting of Event Mail Function .........................................................3-18
Initializing the Settings .....................................................................3-22
About NOZZLE CHECK MENU ................................................... 3-23
INFORMATION MENU table ...........................................................3-23
Printing Check Flow  ........................................................................3-24
Printing Operations at "Nozzle Missing" Judgment and Error 
Occurrence ......................................................................................3-24
Setting of the Printing Check ...........................................................3-25
Setting of the NOZZLE RECOVERY ...............................................3-25
Setting of the Judgment Condition  ..................................................3-25
About INFORMATION MENU  ..................................................... 3-26
INFORMATION MENU table ...........................................................3-27
Displaying the Information ...............................................................3-27
Displaying the machine's information (LOCAL guidance)  ...............3-28
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
Cut Out Data with Register Mark ................................................... 4-2
The Flow of Cutting out the Registered Data  ....................................4-2
Enter register mark detection mode  ..................................................4-2
Precautions for inputting data with register marks  ............................4-2
Settings for Detecting register marks  ................................................4-5
ID Cut  ................................................................................................4-6
About CUTTING MENU ............................................................... 4-11
Cutting MENU table .........................................................................4-12
Setting the CUT MODE  ...............................................................4-13
Perform Multiple Cuttings (Copy function) ................................... 4-13
SETUP SUB MENU ..................................................................... 4-14
Make the media without uncut area (OVER CUT function) .............4-15
Other SETUP SUB MENU  ..............................................................4-15
SETUP RESET  ...............................................................................4-16





iv
Maintenance Function  .................................................................4-17
Maintenance of Mark Sensor  ..........................................................4-17
Perform SAMPLE CUT to Find out the Cause of Cutting Error. ......4-19
Cutting a Medium into Multiple Pieces with a Certain Length  .........4-19
Cutting out Data without Register Marks (PC ORIGIN OFFSET) ....4-20
Setting the Scale Adjust  ..................................................................4-21
Chapter 5 Maintenance
Maintenance  ..................................................................................5-2
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long Time  ..............................5-2
Precautions for Maintenance .............................................................5-2
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces ..........................................................5-2
Cleaning the Platen  ...........................................................................5-2
Cleaning the Media Sensor  ...............................................................5-3
Cleaning the Media Press  .................................................................5-3
About MAINTENANCE MENU .......................................................5-4
MAINTENANCE MENUs table  ..........................................................5-5
Maintaining the Capping Station ....................................................5-6
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap  .............................................................5-6
Cleaning the mist filter....................................................................... 5-7
Clean the NCU .................................................................................. 5-8
Washing the Head Nozzle .................................................................5-9
Cleaning of ink discharge passage  ...................................................5-9
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long Time  ............................5-10
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area around It  ............................5-12
Nozzle Recovery Function ...........................................................5-13
Reset the set value ..........................................................................5-14
Eliminate Ink Over Flow  .............................................................5-14
Automatic Maintenance Function  ................................................5-15
Setting the Refreshing Intervals  ......................................................5-15
Setting the Cleaning Intervals and Type  .........................................5-15
INK FILLING  ................................................................................5-16
AIR PURGE .....................................................................................5-16
Replacing consumables ...............................................................5-18
Replacing the wiper .........................................................................5-18
Replacing the mist filter ................................................................... 5-18
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears  ......................5-19
Replace the waste ink tank with another .........................................5-19
Replacing the waste ink tank before the waste ink tank confirmation 
message is displayed  ......................................................................5-20
Replacing the Cutter Blade  .............................................................5-20
Replacing and Adjusting the Cutter Blade  ...................................5-21
Replacing the cutter  ........................................................................5-21
Adjusting the Cutter Blade ...............................................................5-22
Replacing cutters other than supplied one  ......................................5-22
Adjusting blade edge of cutters other than supplied one  ................5-22





v
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 6-2
Power does not turn on  .....................................................................6-2
The machine does not start printing ..................................................6-2
Media get jammed / media is soiled ..................................................6-2
Image quality is poor  .........................................................................6-3
Nozzle is clogged  ..............................................................................6-3
An error occurred in the ink bottle  .....................................................6-3
When the ink leakage occurs  ............................................................6-3
Warning / Error Messages .............................................................6-4
Warning messages ............................................................................6-4
Error messages .................................................................................6-7
Chapter 7 Appendix
Specification  .................................................................................. 7-2
Printer Section Specifications ............................................................7-2
Cutter Section Specifications  ............................................................7-3
Common Specifications .....................................................................7-4
Ink specifications ...............................................................................7-6
Ink bottle installation order .............................................................7-7
Sheet for inquiry  ............................................................................ 7-8





vi
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OF MIMAKI SHALL BE THE
SOLE  AND  EXCLUSIVE  WARRANTY  AND  IS  IN  LIEU
OF  ALL  OTHER  WARRANTIES,  EXPRESS  OR
IMPLIED,  INCLUDING,  BUT  NOT  LIMITED  TO,  ANY
IMPLIED  WARRANTY  OF  MERCHANTABILITY  OR
FITNESS,  AND  MIMAKI  NEITHER  ASSUMES  NOR
AUTHORIZES  DEALER  TO  ASSUME  FOR  IT  ANY
OTHER  OBLIGATION  OR  LIABILITY  OR  MAKE  ANY
OTHER  WARRANTY  OR  MAKE  ANY  OTHER
WARRANTY  IN  CONNECTION  WITH  ANY  PRODUCT
WITHOUT MIMAKI’S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT.
IN  NO  EVENT  SHALL  MIMAKI  BE  LIABLE  FOR
SPECIAL,  INCIDENTAL  OR  CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES  OR  FOR  LOSS  OF  PROFITS  OF  DEALER
OR CUSTOMERS OF ANY PRODUCT.
Requests
• This Operation manual has been carefully prepared for
your  easy  understanding.However,  please  do  not
hesitate  to  contact  a  distributor  in  your  district  or  our
office if you have any inquiry.
• Description  contained  in  this  Operation  manual  are
subject to change without notice for improvement.
FCC Statement (USA)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of  the  FCC  Rules.  These  limits  are  designed  to  provide
reasonable  protection  against  harmful interference  when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This  equipment  generates,  uses  and  can  radiate  radio
frequency  energy  and,  if  not  installed  and  used  in
accordance  with  the  Operation  manual,  may  cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be  required  to  correct  the  interference  at  his  own
expense.
In  the  case  where  MIMAKI-recommended  cable  is  not
used  for  connection  of  this    machine,  limits  provided  by
FCC rules can be exceeded.
To  prevent  this,  use  of  MIMAKI-recommended  cable  is
essential for the connection of this machine.
Interference to televisions and radios
The  machine  described  in  this  manual  generates  high
frequency when operating. The machine can interfere with
radios  and  televisions  if  set  up  or  commissioned  under
improper  conditions.  The  product  is  not  guaranteed
against  any  damage  to  specific-purpose  radio  and
televisions.
The  machine’s  interference  with  your  radio  or  television
will be checked by turning on/off the power switch of the
machine.  In  the  event  that  the  product  is  the  cause  of
interference,  try  to  eliminate  it  by  taking  one  of  the
following  corrective measures  or taking  some of  them  in
combination.
• Change the orientation of the antenna of the television
set or radio to find a position without reception difficulty.
• Separate the television set or radio from this product.
• Plug the power cord of this product into an outlet which
is  isolated  from  power  circuits  connected  to  the
television set or radio.





vii
Foreword
Foreword
Congratulations  on  your  purchase  of  MIMAKI  UV  ink  jet
printer "UCJV300Series/150Series".
UV  Inkjet  Printer  UCJV300Series/150Series  uses
ultraviolet ray curing ink (UV ink).
Read this Operation Manual carefully and make the most
effective use of your printer.
On This Operation manual
• This  Operation  Manual  is  describing  the  operations
and maintenance of "UV inkjet printer UCJV300Series/
150Series" (hereinafter referred to as the machine).
• Read this  Operation Manual carefully and understand
them  thoroughly  to  use.  It  is  also  necessary  to  keep
this Operation Manual on hand.
• Make arrangements to deliver this Operation Manual to
the person in charge of the operation of this machine.
• This Operation Manual has been carefully prepared for
your  easy  understanding,  however,  please  do  not
hesitate  to  contact  a  distributor  in  your  district  or  our
office if you have any inquiry.
• Descriptions  contained  in  this  Operation  Manual  are
subject to change without any notice for improvement. 
• In  the  case  when  this  Operation  Manual  should  be
illegible due to destruction or lost  by fire or breakage,
purchase  another copy  of  the Operation Manual from
our office.
• You  can  also  download  the  latest  manual  from  our
website.
Reproduction of this manual is strictly prohibited.
© 2017 MIMAKI ENGINEERING Co., Ltd.
Safety Precautions
Symbols
Symbols  are  used  in  this  Operation  Manual  for  safe
operation  and for  prevention  of  damage to  the  machine.
The indicated sign is different depending on the content of
caution.  Symbols  and  their  meanings  are  given  below.
Please follow these instructions as you read this manual.
Examples of symbols
Meaning
Failure  to  observe  the  instructions  given
with  this  symbol  can  result  in  death  or
serious  injuries  to  personnel.  Be  sure  to
read it carefully and use it properly.
Failure  to  observe  the  instructions  given
with  this  symbol  can  result  in  injuries  to
personnel or damage to property.
Important notes  in  use of  this  machine are
given  with  this  symbol.  Understand  the
notes  thoroughly  to  operate  the  machine
properly. 
Important notes  in  use of  this  machine are
given  with  this  symbol.  Understand  the
notes  thoroughly  to  operate  the  machine
properly. 
Indicates  the  reference  page  for  related
contents.
The  symbol  " "  indicates  that  the
instructions must be observed as strictly as
the  CAUTION  instructions  (including
DANGER  and  WARNING  instructions).  A
sign  representing  a  precaution  (the  sign
shown at left warns of hazardous voltage) is
shown in the triangle.
The  symbol  " " indicates that  the  action
shown  is  prohibited.  A  sign  representing  a
prohibited  action  (the  sign  shown  at  left
prohibits  disassembly)  is  shown  in  or
around the circle.
The  symbol  " " indicates that  the  action
shown  must  be  taken  without  fail  or  the
instructions must be observed without fail. A
sign  representing  a  particular  instruction
(the  sign  shown  at  left  instructs  to  unplug
the  cable  from  the  wall  outlet)  is  shown  in
the circle.





viii
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Safety Precautions
Warning for Use Never do the following
WARNING
• The set of power cables provided with this machine
is  for  use  with  this  machine  only,  and  cannot  be
used with other electrical devices. Do not use any
power cables other than the ones provided with the
machine. Failure to observe those instructions may
result in fire or electric shocks.
• Do not use this machine in an environment where
humidity  is  high  or  the  machine  may  get  wet.
Using  the  machine  under  such  environment  may
result in fire or electric shock, or cause malfunction.
• Use  of  the  machine  under  an  abnormal  condition
where  it  produces  smoke  or  strange  smell  can
result  in  fire  or  electric  shocks.  If  such  an
abnormality is found, be sure to turn off the power
switch immediately and unplug the cable from the
wall outlet. Check first that the machine no longer
produces smoke, and contact your distributor or a
sales office of MIMAKI for repair. Never repair your
machine by yourself since it is very dangerous for
you to do so.
• Never  disassemble  or remodel the  main  unit
of the machine or the ink bottle. Disassembly
or remodeling can  result in  an  electric shock
or breakdown of the machine.
• Do not use extension cords. Doing so may result in
fire or electric shocks.
• Keep  the  power  plug  prong  clear  of  any  foreign
object  such  as  a  piece  of  metal.  Failure  to  do  so
may result in a fire or electric shocks.
• Do  not  plug  too  many  leads  into  a  single  socket.
Doing so may result in fire or electric shocks.
• Do not use the machine if the power cord or plug is
damaged. Using the machine with damaged power
cord  may result  in  fire  or  electric  shocks.  Contact
your service representative for replacement cord. 
• Do  not  handle  the  power  plug  with  wet  hands.
Doing so may result in electric shocks.
• Grasp by holding the plug itself when removing the
power plug from wall outlet, and never hold by the
cord. Holding and pulling the cord may damage the
cord, leading to fire or electric shocks.
• When setting the roll media, be sure to do so with
at least one other person.
• In  case  of  ink  leakage,  please  turn  off  the  main
power,  unplug  the  power  cable  and  contact  our
service office or distributor.
• Do not use a flammable spray or solvent inside or
around the machine. Doing so may result in fire or
electric shocks.
• Do  not  place  a  vase,  flower  pot,  water  glass,
container  with  liquid  such  as  water  or  chemicals
inside, or small metallic object near or on top of this
machine.  Liquid  or  foreign  object  may  get  inside
the machine, leading to fire or electric shocks.
• Do not use this machine in an area where children
might be present.
• The  ink  used  for  this  machine  falls  into  the
category of UN No.3082 and UN Class 9. Since the
ink  is  flammable,  never  use  fire  when  using  the
machine.
WARNING
Do not disassemble or remodel the machine
• Never disassemble or remodel the main unit of
the machine or the ink bottles. Disassembly or
remodeling  can  result  in  an  electric  shock  or
breakdown of the machine.
Power supply and voltage
• Use  this  machine  with  the  indicated  power
specifications.  Be  sure  to  connect  the  power
cable plug to a grounded outlet. Failure to do
so may result in fire or electric shocks.
• Never  look  at    the  illuminated  LED  UV  with
your naked eyes. Doing so could cause pain in
your  eyes  or  visual  impairment.  Be  sure  to
wear safety glasses.
• Do not expose your  skin  directly to ultraviolet
(UV) light. Doing so could cause skin irritation.
• To prevent electrical shock, be sure to turn off
the main power circuit breaker and disconnect
the  power  plug  before  carrying  out
maintenance. For some units, it may take one
minute  for  the  capacitors  to  discharge.
Therefore, wait three minutes after turning off
the  main  power  circuit  breaker  and
disconnecting  the  power  plug  before  starting
maintenance work.
• Although  rare,  LED  UV  units  can  become
damaged.  We recommend  replacing the  LED
UV  unit  when  it  has  reached  its  rated
operation life, or earlier.
• The  main  power  circuit  breaker  should  be
turned  on  only  by  personnel  with  sufficient
knowledge  about  the  operation  of  this
machine.
• The  LED  UV  unit  is  hot  while  it  is  on  and
immediately  after  it  has  been  turned  off.  Do
not  touch  it  with  your  bare  hands.  Doing  so
could result in burns.
Do not use this machine in damp places
• Do  not  use  this  machine  in  an  environment
with high humidity or where the machine could
get  wet.  Using  the  machine  under  such
environment  may  result  in  fire  or  electric
shock, or cause malfunction.
Handling ink bottles
• Some  of  the  ingredients  (UV  curing  initiator)
are  toxic  to  aquatic  life.  Avoid  any  leaks  into
water systems or sewage systems.
• Store  ink  bottles  and  waste  ink  bottles  in  a
place that is out of the reach of children.
• If  you  get  ink  on  your  skin  or  clothing,
immediately  wash  it  off  with  detergent  or
water. If you get ink in your eyes, immediately
wash your eyes with a lot of clean water, and
then consult a doctor as soon as possible.
• Dispose  of  waste  ink  according to the local
regulations  of  the  area  where  the  machine
isused.





ix
Safety Precautions
Notes on maintenance
• When handling ink and cleaning solution, pay
close  attention  to  ventilation  and  be  sure  to
wear the included safety glasses and gloves.
• The  gloves  supplied  with  the  machine  are
disposable.  When  all  the  gloves  are
expended, purchase an equivalent product on
the market.
• Before  using  ink  and  cleaning  solution,  be
sure to read the Safety Data Sheet (SDS).
• Keep ink away from an open flame. Also keep
the  room  well  ventilated  when  you  use  or
handle ink.
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash
your eyes thoroughly with a lot of clean water
for at least 15 minutes. Then, consult a doctor
as soon as possible.
• If  anyone  drinks  ink  by  mistake,  keep  him  or
her quiet and see a doctor immediately. Do not
allow  him  or  her  to  swallow  the  vomit.  Then
contact the emergency number written on the
SDS.
• If you inhale a great deal of vapor and feel ill,
immediately move to a location  with  plenty of
fresh  air,  and  keep  yourself  warm  and  quiet.
Consult a doctor as soon as possible.
• If  the  ink  adheres  to  your  skin,  use  a  large
amount of water and soap or special detergent
for skin to remove the ink.
Periodic replacement parts
• Some parts of this machine must be replaced with new ones
periodically  by  service  personnel.  Be  sure  to  make  a
contract with your distributor or dealer for After sale service
to ensure a long life of your machine.
Protection of media from dust
• Store media in a bag. Wiping off dust accumulated on media
will adversely affect the media due to static electricity.
• When leaving the workshop after the working hours, do not
leave any media on the roll hanger. If any media is left on the
roll hanger, it can get dusty.
Clump lever
• Never  raise  the  lever during  printing.  Raising  the  lever will
abort printing.
Notes on maintenance
• It  is  strongly  recommended  to  use  the  machine  in  a  room
that is not dusty.
• Dust  in  the  heads  can  also  cause  drops  of  ink  to  fall
suddenly down on the media during printing. In such a case,
be sure to clean up the heads.
• Perform  wiping (removal  of  dust  and  paper powder)  of  the
capping station and wiper frequently.
WARNING
Handling ink bottles
• The safety evaluation of this machine assumes that the ink
recommended by this  company is used.  For safe  usage of
this machine, use the ink recommend by this company.
• Never refill the ink bottles with ink. Refilled ink cartridge can
cause  a  trouble.  Remember  that  MIMAKI  assumes  no
responsibility for  any damage caused by the use of the ink
cartridge replenished with ink.
• If an ink bottle is moved from a cold place to a warm place,
leave it at room temperature for at least three hours before
using it.
• Open the ink bottle just before installing it in the machine. If it
is  opened  and  left  for  an  extended  period  of  time,  normal
printing performance of the machine may not be ensured.
• Make sure to store ink bottles in a cool and dark place.
• Store ink bottles and waste ink bottles in a place that is out
of the reach of children.
• Once  an  ink  bottle  is  opened,  be  sure  to  thoroughly
consume the ink within three months. If an extended period
of  time  has  passed  away  after opening  the  cartridge  tank,
printing quality would be poor.
• Do not pound ink bottles or shake them violently. Doing so
could cause the ink to leak.
• Consult with your sales or service representative regarding
the proper disposal of ink bottles and waste ink. When you
dispose  them  by  yourself,  follow  the  regulations  stipulated
by the industrial waste disposer or the country or region you
live in.
Handling of media
• Use  media  recommended  by  MIMAKI  to  ensure  reliable,
high-quality printing.
• Pay attention to the expansion and contraction of the media.
Do not use  media  immediately after unpacking. The  media
can be affected by the room temperature and humidity, and
thus it may expand and contract. The media have to be left
in  the  atmosphere  in  which  they  are  to  be  used  for  30
minutes or more after unpacked.
• Do not use curled media.
The use of curled media can not only cause a media jam but
also affect print quality.
Straighten the sheet of media, if significantly curled, before
using it for printing. If a regular-sized coated sheet of media
is rolled and stored, the coated side has to face outside.
Disposition of this machine
• Consult  your  sales  or  service  representative  for  proper
disposal  of  this  machine.  Otherwise,  commission  an
industrial waste disposal company.
WARNING





x
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Safety Precautions
Precautions in Use
Cautions on Installation
CAUTION
Handling of the power cable
• Connect  to  a  socket-outlet  with  determinate
polarity.
• For  PLUGGABLE  EQUIPMENT,  the  socket-
outlet  shall  be  installed  near  the  equipment
and shall be easily accessible.
• Unplug  the  cord  from  the  wall  outlet  and
remove dust from the power plug periodically,
at  least  once  a  year.  Failure  to  do  so  may
result in fire or electric shocks.
• Do not use the machine unless it is connected
to a power supply that satisfies the displayed
voltage condition.
• Check  the  voltage  of  the  wall  outlet  and  the
capacity of the circuit breaker before you plug
the  power  cords.  Plug  each  power  cord  to
different  outlet  that  has  independent  circuit
breaker If you plug more than one power cord
to  wall  outlets  that  share  the  same  circuit
breaker,  the  power  may  be  cut  off  by  the
breaker.
Power supply
• Leave the breaker turned ON.
• Do  not turn  off the main  power switch  on  the
right side of this machine.
Ultraviolet (UV) light
• Some  leakage  of  ultraviolet  light  occurs
around  the  LED  UV  unit.  Exposing  skin  and
eyes  to  ultraviolet  light  could  cause
inflammation  and  skin  cancer.  Even  if  weak
ultraviolet  light  does  not  cause  inflammation,
chronic  disorders  could  develop  due  to
repeated  exposure. Avoid exposing your  skin
and eyes to ultraviolet light.
• Visual impairments that can occur as a  result
of  exposure  to  ultraviolet  light  include  acute
disorders  such  as  pain  or  excess  tearing  in
response  to  foreign  matter,  and  chronic
disorders such  as cataracts. When  using this
machine, be sure to wear gloves, long-sleeved
clothing, a visor over your face, and the
shaded  glasses  that  are  included  with  the
machine.
Notes on the LED UV unit
• When handling the glass on the bottom of the
LED  UV  unit,  be  sure  to  wear  the  included
gloves.  Never  touch the glass  with  your bare
hands. Otherwise, the UV ink curing level may
drop  significantly.  If  the  glass  becomes  dirty,
wipe  it  with  clean  gauze  moistened  with
alcohol.  (Do  not  use  alcohol  for  cleaning  the
exterior cover, or the paint will peel off.) 
• The LED UV performance and service life are
significantly affected by the UV irradiation and
UV power supply units that are used. Only use
UV  devices  that  are  recommended  by
Mimaki.Mimaki shall bear no responsibility for
any trouble due to the use of UV devices other
than those that are recommended.
Be careful with the movable parts
• Do  not  touch the  rolling  grit roller. Otherwise,
you  could  hurt  your  fingers  or  tear  off  your
finger nails.
• Keep  your  head  and  hands  away  from  any
moving  parts  during  cutting  (plotting)
operation. Otherwise, your hair could become
caught  in  the  machine.  Wear  proper  clothes.
(Do not wear loose-fit clothes or accessories).
Bind a long hair.
Caution with cutters
• The cutter blades are very sharp. Do not touch
them.
• Do  not  shake  or  swing  the  cutter  holder.
Otherwise, the blade may come off.
Hot parts
• The  LED  UV  unit  is  very  hot.  Before
performing  maintenance  work,  wait  until  the
temperature has dropped sufficiently after the
LED UV unit has been turned off.
• If touching hot parts is unavoidable, be sure to
wear  heat-insulating  gloves  to  protect  your
hands.
CAUTION
A place exposed to direct 
sunlight
On an inclined surface
A place that vibrates
A place exposed to direct 
air flow from an air 
conditioner
A place where the 
temperature or humidity 
varies significantly
Around a place where fire
is used
• Use the 
machine under 
the following 
environmental 
conditions:
• Operating 
environment:
20 to 30 °C
 (68 to 86 °F)
35 to 65 % (Rh)
CAUTION





Safety Precautions
xi
Safety interlock
For your safety, this machine is equipped with interlocks to stop all operations if a cover is opened while the machine is
printing.
(parts circled in red in the figure below)





Warning labels
xii
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Warning labels
Warning labels are attached to the machine. Be sure to fully understand the warning given on the labels.
If a warning label is illegible due to stains or has come off, purchase a new one from a distributor or our sales office.

3
4
7
5
2
2
3
6
1
1
8

Around the carriage
When the maintenance cover is open





Warning labels
xiii
No. Reorder Label
1
M910931
2
M907833
3
M903330
4
M903405
5
M907935
6
M905811
7
M913419
8
M905935





This chapter
tells you what you should know before using this machine, including the name of each
part and the installation procedures.
Moving This Machine .................................... 1-2
Where to Install This Machine ..................... 1-2
Working Environmental Temperature  ......... 1-2
Moving This Machine  .................................. 1-2
Names of Parts and Functions...................... 1-3
Front Side of the Machine  ........................... 1-3
Rear Side and Right Side of the Machine  ... 1-4
Carriage  ...................................................... 1-5
Operation Panel  .......................................... 1-6
Media Sensor  .............................................. 1-8
Carriage  ...................................................... 1-8
Cutter Blade and Cutting Slot ...................... 1-8
Capping Station ........................................... 1-8
Pinch Rollers and Grit Rollers  ..................... 1-8
Connecting Cables........................................ 1-9
Connecting USB 2.0 Interface Cable ...........1-9
Connecting a LAN Cable  .............................1-9
Connecting the Power Cable  .....................1-10
Ink Bottles ................................................... 1-11
Types of Inks You Can Use with the 
Machine  .....................................................1-11
Precautions on Using the Ink Bottles .........1-11
Installing the Ink Bottles .............................. 1-12
Media .......................................................... 1-17
The Size of Media That Can Be Used with 
This Machine  .............................................1-17
Precautions on Handling the Media ...........1-17
Menu Mode ................................................. 1-18
Chapter 1
Before Use





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-2
Moving This Machine
Where to Install This Machine
Secure  a  suitable  installation  space  before  assembling
this machine.
The place of installation must have enough space for not
only this machine itself but also for the printing operation.
Working Environmental Temperature
Use  this  machine  in  an  environment  of  20  to  30°C  to
ensure reliable printing.
Moving This Machine
Follow the procedure described below when you have to
move  this  machine  to  a  different  place  within  the  same
floor that does not have any steps.
1
Remove the caster blocks.
2
Move this machine as shown in the figure.
• This  machine  must  be  moved  by  at  least  4
people.  This  work  shall  be  performed  in
accordance  with  the  regulations  of  each  country
and region.
• Do  not  push  the  cover  to  move  this  machine
because doing so can cause the cover to crack.
3
Put the caster blocks back in place.
Model Width Depth Height
Gross 
weight
UCJV300-160
2900mm
(114.2 in)
776mm
(30.6 in)
1475mm
(5801 in)
188kg
(414.5 lb)
UCJV300-130
2650mm
(104.3ln)
776mm
(30.6 in)
1475mm
(5801 in)
177kg
(390.2lb)
UCJV300-107
2380mm
(93.7in)
776mm
(30.6 in)
1475mm
(5801 in)
161kg
(354.9lb)
UCJV300-75
2090mm
(82.3in)
776mm
(30.6 in)
1475mm
(5801 in)
144kg
(317.5lb)
UCJV150-160
2900mm
(114.2 in)
776mm
(30.6 in)
1475mm
(5801 in)
183kg
(410.1 lb)
• If you need to move the machine to any other 
places, contact your distributor or our service 
office.
Moving the machine by yourself may cause failure 
or damage to the machine.
Be sure to request your distributor or our service 
office to move this machine.
• When moving this machine, take care not to sub-
ject it to excessive shocks.
• Be sure to lock the casters after moving this 
machine.

500 mm (19.7 in)
minimum
3900
 m
m (
15
3
.5 i
n)
 m
i
ni
mum (
1
60Mod
el
)
3
650 mm
 (
143
.7 i
n)
 m
i
n
i
m
um (
1
3
0Mod
el
)
3
380 mm
 
(
133.
0 
i
n)
 mi
ni
m
um (
10
7Mode
l
)
30
90 mm
 (
121.
7 i
n)
 mi
ni
m
u
m (
75
Mo
del
)
2
7
7
6
 
m
m
 
(
1
0
9
.
3
 
i
n
)
 
500 mm (19.7 in) 
minimum
1
0
0
0
 
m
m
 
(
3
9
.
3
 
i
n
)
m
i
n
i
mu
m
1
0
0
0
 
mm
 
(
3
9
.
3
 
i
n
)
m
i
n
i
m
u
m





1-3
Chapter 1 Before Use
1
2
2
2
2
Names of Parts and Functions
Front Side of the Machine

Operation panel
This panel has the operation keys 
required for operating the machine and 
the LCDs for displaying setting items, 
etc.
Clamp lever (front)
Moves the pinch rollers up and down to hold or 
release the media.
Waste ink tank
Waste ink gathers in this tank.
Stand
Supports the main body of the machine. It is 
provided with casters that are used to move 
this machine.
After cover
The printed media is output 
along the after cover.
Ink supply unit
The ink bottles are inserted here. ( P.1-12)
Take-up device
Automatically winds up the printed roll media.
Carriage
The print head moves from side to side.
Maintenance cover
Open these covers only when you have to perform 
maintenance. Normally, keep all covers closed even 
when the power switch is off,
Platen
Area where media is flattened 
and printed.





1-4
Chapter 1 Before Use
Rear Side and Right Side of the Machine

AC inlet
Connect the power cable to the AC inlet.
Clamp lever (rear)
Interlocks with the clamp lever in 
the font of this machine.
USB connector
This is a USB 2.0 interface connector.
Main power switch (INLET 1)
Turns on/off the main power for this machine. Leave 
the main power turned on to prevent ink clogging.
Vent filter box
Vents the ink mist 
generated during printing.
Roll holder
Grabs the roll media by the ends of 
its paper core to hold the media in 
place. It supports 2-inch and 3-inch 
paper cores.
LAN connector
Use this connector when you use network functions.





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-5
1
2
2
2
2
Carriage
The carriage  is equipped  with a print  head and  an LED-
UV unit for printing.
• Do not look into the light emitted from the LED-UV 
unit directly with the naked eye, regardless of 
whether the front cover is placed on top of it. The 
emitted light can be extremely bright under some 
printing conditions.
• Remember to wear the UV protective glasses sup-
plied with the machine.

UV light
Front cover





1-6
Chapter 1 Before Use
Operation Panel
Use the operation panel to specify print settings or to operate this machine.
*1: Ink status
The display shows icons indicating the status (remaining ink, error, etc.) of ink bottles.
The following table describes each icon:
Icon Meaning
The ink bottle icons are arranged in the same order as the actual ink bottles are arranged in the ink supply unit. For 
each ink bottle icon, the remaining ink is indicated in nine levels.
The following icons are arranged in descending order of remaining ink level:
This icon is displayed at ink end or ink near end.
Be aware that the ink is running low.
Indicates that the cartridge cannot be used due to ink end or ink error (remaining ink 0, cartridge not attached, etc.).
Indicates that ink has expired or that one month has passed since the expiration date. Please replace the ink bottle 
as soon as possible. After two months from the expiration date, the ink bottle can no longer be used.

width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL

Status indicator lamp
Indicates the machine's status (printing, an error has occurred, etc).
Lamp state Machine state
Off
The machine is in LOCAL mode, which means that there is no 
incoming print data or error occurring on the machine.
Solid light blue The machine is in REMOTE mode.
Blinking light 
blue
The machine is currently printing data.
The machine is performing a test print or other similar 
operation (that is, the machine is printing the patterns stored in 
it).
Solid blue There is remaining print data in the machine.
Blinking red An error has occurred.
Solid red An error (SYSTEM HALT) has occurred.
Display
The display shows the following 
information:
• Status of the machine
• Width of the set media
•Ink status 
*1
• Functions assigned to [FUNC1], 
[FUNC2] and [FUNC3] 
*2
 button
Press this button to select a function to 
be assigned to each function button 
([FUNC1], [FUNC2] and [FUNC3]).
//
buttons
Press one of these buttons to set a 
function or to perform test printing. With 
each pressing of the [SEL] button, you 
can change the function assigned to the 
selected function button.
JOG button
Use these buttons to move the head or 
media during LOCAL mode or to select 
a setting.
 button
Use this button to cancel the entered 
setting or to go back to the previous 
level of the setting menu. You can also 
use this button to turn the power on or 
off. (Give it a long press to turn the 
power off.)
 button
• When the power is turned on using the [END/POWER] key, the [ENTER] key lights up blue and turns off when the 
power switch is turned off. While the main power switch ( P.1-4) is on, the ink clogging prevention function is peri-
odically operated even when the power is turned off using the [END/POWER] key.

Ink full
Approximatel
y 1/8 
consumed
Approximatel
y 1/4 
consumed
Approximatel
y 3/8 
consumed
Approximatel
y 1/2 
consumed
Approximatel
y 5/8 
consumed
Approximatel
y 3/4 
consumed
Approximatel
y 7/8 
consumed
Near end





1-7
Chapter 1 Before Use
1
2
2
2
2
*2: Functions assigned to [FUNC1], [FUNC2], and [FUNC3]
The following table describes the functions assigned to [FUNC1], [FUNC2], and [FUNC3], respectively:
Icon Meaning
Displays a menu for setting functions.
Displays maintenance functions such as test print, cleaning, etc.
Exits LOCAL mode and enters REMOTE mode to start printing.
Displays adjustment functions such as FEED COMP, DROP.POScorrect, etc.
Clears data.
Suspends printing in REMOTE mode and enters LOCAL mode.
Cuts the media.
Moves to the previous page when multiple items are displayed on a screen (for example, on the MENU screen).
Moves to the next page when multiple items are displayed on a screen (for example, on the MENU screen).
Used for confirmation of a displayed message (for example, a warning message).
Used to turn off or disable a function.
Indicates that some setting or function has been assigned here. Use the assigned setting or function by 
following the instructions provided for it.
Enables or disables the operation specified for the selected items (applicable when multiple items are selected, 
for example, when multiple heads are selected for cleaning).
Sets cutting conditions.
Confirms or sets cutting-related functions, including test cutting.
Sets the pressure of the pinch rollers.
• The color of the icons changes according to the state of the printer.
When the icon is green: The machine is in REMOTE mode.
When the icon is dark blue: The machine is in LOCAL mode.
When the icon is yellow: A warning has been issued.
When the icon is red: An error has occurred.





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-8
Media Sensor
The media sensor detects the presence of the media and
the media length.
This machine has one media sensor on the platen (in the
rear).
Carriage
The  carriage  consists  of  the  printer  unit  and  the  cutter
unit.
Printer unit
Cutter unit
Cutter Blade and Cutting Slot
The cutter unit is equipped with a cutter blade for cutting
the media.
The  cutter  cuts  off  the  sheet  of  media  along  the  cutting
slot on the platen.
Capping Station
The capping station consists of the ink caps, the wiper for
cleaning the heads, etc.
The  ink  caps  prevent  the  nozzles  in  the  ink  heads  from
drying up.
The wiper cleans the nozzles in the heads.
The  wiper  is  a  consumable.  If  the  wiper  becomes
deformed  or  the  media  gets  stained,  replace  the  wiper
with a new one.
Pinch Rollers and Grit Rollers
The pinch rollers and grit rollers hold the media in place.
• When setting media, be sure to cover the media 
sensor located on the rear of the platen. The 
media cannot be detected unless it is placed over 
the sensor.

Media sensor

Printer unit

Cutter unit

• Remember to wear the protective safety glasses 
supplied with the machine when cleaning the 
inside of the capping station. This precaution is 
necessary to prevent ink from getting in your eyes.
• Keep the pinch rollers lifted up when this machine 
is not in use. Leaving the pinch rollers lowered for 
an extended period of time can cause them to 
become deformed and thus unable to securely 
hold the media in place.

Cutter
Cutting slot

Grit roller Pinch roller





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-9
1
2
2
2
2
Connecting Cables
Connecting USB 2.0 Interface Cable
Connect  your  computer  and  this  machine  with  the  USB
2.0 interface cable.
Notes on the USB 2.0 interface
 When connecting more than one 
UCJV300Series/150Series machine to your 
computer
When more than one UCJV300Series/150Series machine
is connected to your computer, the computer might not be
able to properly recognize the connected machines.
If  your  computer  has  more  than  one  USB  port,  try
connecting  the  machine  that  your  computer  previously
failed  to  recognize  to  another  USB  port  to  see  if  your
computer  can  then  recognize  the  machine.  If  your
computer  still  fails  to  recognize  the  machine,  use  a
commercially available USB 2.0 repeater cable.
 Peripheral devices that run in USB high-speed
mode
If  you  use  a  UCJV300Series/150Series  machine  with
peripheral  devices  that  run  in  USB  high-speed  mode
(USB stick, USB-HDD, etc.), your computer might not be
able to recognize the USB devices.
Also, when connecting the UCJV300 series or UCJV150
series to the computer which is connected to the external
USB hard disk drive and so on, the data output speed to
the UCJV300 series or UCJV150 series may decrease.
This may cause the print head to stop at the right edge or
left edge while printing.
 Removing the USB stick
If a USB stick is inserted to  the  computer  to  which  a
UCJV300Series/150Series  machine  is  connected,  select
"Safely Remove Hardware" and then "Stop" to remove the
USB stick.
Failure  to  observe  this  causes  [ERROR  10  COMMAND
ERROR].
Connecting a LAN Cable
When  connecting  a  LAN  cable,  observe  the  following
precautions:
Printing data via a network
If you are printing data via a network, you must configure
a network in an environment described below.
Configuring  a  network  in  an  inappropriate  environment
can cause printing to stop prematurely.
 ・Use a category 6 or higher LAN cable.
 ・Use  a  computer  and  a  switching  hub  that  support
1000BASE-T.
• Your RIP must be compatible with the USB 2.0 
interface.
• If your computer does not have a USB 2.0 inter-
face, contact a RIP manufacturer near your loca-
tion or our office for assistance.
• Your RIP must be compatible with USB 2.0.

USB cable

• Insert the LAN cable until it clicks into place.
• Do not remove and then reinsert the LAN cable 
during data transfer.
• The computer to which to send printed data and 
the printer must use the same network.
• Connection via a router is not supported.

 Connecting  the  computer  directly  to  the
printer





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-10
If the computer or device connected to the printer uses a
network other than 1000BASE-T, printing is not possible.
After connecting  the computer  or device with  the printer,
check the following:
(1) Check the information displayed on the screen on 
the printer.
• From  the  local  screen  or  media  detection  screen,  press
the [Enter] key several times until the information screen
appears.
• Confirm that "1000Mbps" is displayed as the LAN status.
(2) Check the LAN connector's green lamp.
• After  the  main  unit  starts  up,  the  LAN  connector's  lamp
can indicate one of the following states:
Connecting the Power Cable
1
Insert the power cable into the inlet on the
machine.
2
Secure a cable band.
• Secure the cable with the cable band attached to
this machine.
3
Insert the power plug into a plug socket.
• If [100Mbps], [10Mbps], or [Not connected] is dis-
played as the LAN status, you cannot print data 
via a LAN.
• If [100Mbps] or [10Mbps] is displayed as the LAN 
status, event messages will be available 
( Chapter 3 Setting of Event Mail Function).
Color State State
Green
Solid
Connected via 1000BASE-T
Off
Connected via a network other 
than 1000BASE-T
Yellow
Solid
Link-up
Blinking Data reception in progress
Off Link-down
• When only the yellow lamp is solidly lit or blinking, 
the network is not running at 1000 Mbps. Check 
the specifications of the computer, devices, and 
cables.

Switching hub
 Connecting the computer to the printers via a
switching hub

INFORMATION
LAN Status 1000Mbps

• Use only the power cable supplied with the 
machine.
• Be sure to connect the power cable to the outlet 
near this machine, and make sure that the power 
cable can be easily removed.
• Connect the power cable to the grounded outlet. 
Failure to observe this could lead to electric 
shocks or fire.

Inlet
Power cable
Cable band

Power plug
Socket





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-11
1
2
2
2
2
Ink Bottles
Insert each ink bottle into the ink supply unit for use.
You will find eight (or four in the case of UCJV150 Series)
ink bottles on the left of the machine.
Types  of  Inks  You  Can  Use  with  the
Machine
Colors are indicated as follows on the display:
Notes on installing the ink bottles
Observe the following precautions when installing the ink
bottles:
Precautions on Using the Ink Bottles
Ink type Color
UV ink
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Black
White (UCJV300Series only)
Clear (UCJV300Series only)
Light cyan (UCJV300Series only)
Light magenta (UCJV300Series only)
Cleaning liquid bottle 
*1
*1. Used for head cleaning.
Display Color Display Color
M Magenta WWhite
CCyanCL Clear
YYellow Lc Light cyan
KBlackLm Light magenta
• Check the ink slot number and insert an ink bottle 
of the correct color into the ink supply unit.
• Insert each ink bottle all the way into the slot. Do 
not use excessive force when inserting or pulling 
out ink bottles.
• Insert an IC chip into the slot on the ink supply 
unit.
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately and thor-
oughly flush your eyes with plenty of running water 
for at least 15 minutes, with eyelids held open. 
Seek medical attention as soon as possible.
• Use genuine ink bottles for this machine. This 
machine functions by recognizing the genuine ink 
bottles. Our limited warranty does not cover dam-
age resulting from modification of ink bottles or 
other parts of the machine.
• Store the ink bottles in a location no more than 1 m 
from the floor surface. If the ink bottles are 
dropped from a height of more than 1 m onto a 
floor surface, the impact of the fall can cause the 
caps on the ink bottles to come off, causing the ink 
inside to spill out.
• If the ink bottles are moved from a cold place to a 
warm place, leave it in the room temperature for 
three hours or more before using it.
• Store the ink bottles in a cold and dark place.
• Keep the ink bottles out of reach of children.
• The ink contains an ingredient that is toxic to 
aquatic organisms (photopolymerization initiator). 
Take all measures necessary to prevent it from 
leaking into natural water sources and sewage 
systems.
• Read the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) before using 
the ink bottles.
• Ask an industrial waste disposal company to dis-
pose of waste ink bottles.
• Do not shake the ink bottles violently. Shaking the 
ink bottles violently can cause ink to leak out of the 
bottles.
• Never refill the ink bottles with ink. Doing so may 
result in a failure. MIMAKI will not bear any 
responsibility for any damage caused by using ink 
bottles that have been refilled with ink.
• Do not touch or stain the part where the IC chip 
comes into contact with the printed circuit board. 
Doing so can cause damage to the printed circuit 
board.
• The ink bottles can get dented in the middle, as 
shown in the figure to the right, even when they 
are inserted into the machine. This, however, does 
not affect the performance of this machine.





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-12
Installing the Ink Bot-
tles
1
Take  out  an ink  bottle and  gently  shake it
from side to side at least 20 times.
• While  wearing  gloves,  hold  the  cap  of  the  ink
bottle tightly with a paper towel or a similar object,
and then gently shake the bottle from side to side
at  least  20  times  to  let  the  ink  flow  inside  the
bottle.
2
Remove the cap from the bottle.
3
Screw the special cap onto the ink bottle.
(1) Screw the special cap onto the bottle.
• Confirm that the cap is firmly closed, and then 
gently shake the bottle.
• Remember to shake the bottle gently. Shaking the 
bottle violently can cause the ink to leak out.
• When the remaining ink is low, tilt the ink bottle all 
the way to the right and left until the bottle is in the 
upright position to ensure that the ink inside the 
bottle is thoroughly mixed.

Hold the cap of the ink bottle tightly with a paper 
towel, and gently shake the ink bottle.
Repeat

• If, after removing the cap from the bottle, you find 
that the bottle opening has a seal attached to it, 
use a cutter to open the seal. Cut the seal as 
shown in the figure below so that the seal is 
divided into eight parts, and then bend the cut seal 
toward the inside of the bottle.
• Make sure that the cut seal is bent securely toward 
the inside of the bottle. If the cut seal is not bent 
securely, an ink supply shortage can occur.
•

Cut the seal as shown in the figure to 
the left so that the seal is divided into 
eight parts, and then bend the cut 
seal toward the inside of the bottle.

Special cap
Cap B





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-13
1
2
2
2
2
(2) Tighten the special cap securely onto the 
bottle by using the tightening jig.
(3) Turn the bottle upside down to confirm that 
no ink leaks out.
4
Insert the ink bottle into the tank.
• Slide the lever on the tank all the way to the right,
and then insert the ink bottle into the tank.
5
Slide  the  lever  on  the  tank  from  right  to
left.
6
Insert an IC chip into the slot.
• Insert an IC chip into the slot, with the metal part
facing  upward.  Incorrectly  inserting  the  IC  chip
can lead to failure or cause the IC chip to break.
• Do not touch the metal part of the IC chip. Doing
so can cause damage to the IC chip due to static
electricity or lead to reading failure due  to stains
or scratches.
• For details about how to install the ink bottles, see
P. 7- 7 「Ink bottle installation order」.
• Turn the tightening jig until the arrow mark on the 
tightening jig is aligned with the arrow mark on the 
special cap.
• Do not close the special cap too tightly. Doing so 
can cause damage.
• Do not leave ink bottles with the special cap 
attached in a place exposed to light for a pro-
longed period of time. Doing so can cause the ink 
inside to harden.

Turn the tightening jig 
until  on the tightening 
jig is aligned with the 
arrow mark on the 
special cap.
Tightening jig

• Never turn the ink bottle after inserting it into the 
tank, Doing so can cause ink to leak out.

Lever

IC chip





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-14
Replacing the ink bottles
When  [INK  END]  or  [INK  NEAR  END]  shows  up  on  the
display, follow the steps described below.
 When [INK END] is displayed
1
Slide  the  lever  on  the  tank  all  the  way  to
the right.
2
Lift the ink bottle straight up.
IC chip
• The IC chip contains information 
regarding the color, remaining 
level, and expiration date of the 
ink.
When installing an ink bottle, 
insert the IC chip that comes 
with the ink bottle into the IC 
chip slot on the ink cover.
• Inserting a wrong IC chip (that 
is, an IC chip other than the one 
that comes with the ink bottle) 
into the slot can cause poor 
image quality or other problems.
• The IC chip has a marking applied to it to provide 
color information.

IC chip
Marking is 
provided here.

Ink color and the corresponding marking
Ink color Marking
Black (One black circle)
Cyan (One blue circle)
Magenta (One red circle)
Yellow (One yellow circle)
White (One white circle)
Clear (Two white circle)
Light cyan (Two blue circles)
Light magenta (Two red circles)

• Remember to wear protective glasses.
• Do not turn the ink bottle.
Doing so can cause ink to leak out.
• After removing the ink bottle from the tank, confirm 
that the light-blocking cover is closed.
If the lid is open, close it by hand. Leaving the 
light-blocking cover open causes the ink to 
harden.
• Be careful not to spill any ink from the bottle.

Light-blocking 
cover





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-15
1
2
2
2
2
3
Wipe off the ink with the wiper filter.
4
Wipe off the ink attached to the cap.
• Hold  the  bottle  with  the  cap  facing  upward  and
wipe off the ink attached to the cap with a paper
towel or a similar object.
5
Remove the cap from the used ink bottle.
• If  you  have  difficulty  removing  the  cap,  use  the
tightening jig to remove the cap.
6
Install a new ink bottle by referring to P.1-
12"Installing the Ink Bottles".
 When [INK NEAR END] is displayed
The remaining ink level is low. Although you can continue
printing, the machine may run out of ink while printing. We
therefore  recommend  that  you  replace  the  ink  bottle  as
soon as possible.
If you press the   key in LOCAL mode, you can
view a local guidance that provides information regarding
the bottle that requires replacement. 
( P.3-27)
You can also check the ink bottle lamp to find the bottle to
replace.(P.1-16)
If the light-blocking cover comes off
If the light-blocking cover comes off, the inside of the tank
is exposed to light, which causes the ink to harden.
If the  light-blocking cover comes off, attach it to the tank
as follows:
1
Insert one of the lugs on the light-blocking
cover  into  one  of  the  receiving  holes  on
the tank.
2
While  pressing  the  light-blocking  cover
against  the  receiving  hole  into  which  you
have just inserted the lug, insert the other
lug into the remaining hole on the tank.
• Do not leave ink bottles with the special cap 
attached in a place exposed to light for a pro-
longed period of time. Doing so can cause the ink 
inside to harden.

Wiper filter





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-16
Expiration date of the ink
The ink bottle has an expiration date.
Although  you  can  continue  using  the  ink  bottle  until  two
months  after  the  expiration  date  specified  on  the  ink
bottle,  when  three  months  elapses  from  the  expiration
date, the ink bottle becomes unusable.
A warning message appears when an ink bottle becomes
unusable.  When  this  message  appears,  replace  the
applicable ink bottle.
Example: If April 2018 is specified as the expiration date:
May: Usable
June: Usable (solid yellow LED) 
July: Unusable (blinking red LED)
Ink end and ink near end
A  warning  message  appears  at  ink  near  end  (when  the
remaining ink level is low). When this message appears,
we recommend that you replace the applicable ink bottle
as soon as possible.
A warning  message appears  at ink  end (when the ink is
empty).  When  this  message  appears,  replace  the
applicable ink bottle.
Ink bottle lamps
The lamps located above the ink bottles tell you the status
of the installed ink bottles.
Lamp status Description
Solid blue Normal (ink is being supplied)
Off Normal
Solid yellow
or blinking 
yellow
One of the following errors has occurred:
• Ink near end
• One month past the expiration date
Blinking red Two months past the expiration date
Solid red
One of the following errors has occurred:
•Ink end
• No ink IC chip inserted
• Other ink errors (  P.6-6)

Ink bottle lamps





1-17
Chapter 1 Before Use
1
2
2
2
2
Media
This section describes the size of media that can be used with this machine and how to handle it.
The Size of Media That Can Be Used with This Machine
Precautions on Handling the Media
Observe the following precautions for handling the media:
Model UCJV300/150-160 UCJV300-130 UCJV300-107 UCJV300-75
Type of recommended media
Label stock (paper-based) / PVC sheet (including laminated sheet, 0.25 mm thick maximum) / 
reflective sheet (excluding high-luminance reflective sheet) / heat transfer rubber sheet
Maximum width 1620mm (63.8in) 1371mm (54.0in) 1100mm (43.3in) 810mm (31.9in)
Minimum width 210mm (8.3in)
Maximum print width 1610mm (63.4in) 
*1
*1. When the MARGIN(RIGHT/LEFT) setting has been set to the minimum (-10 mm).
1361mm (53.6in)
*1
1090mm (42.9in)
*1
800mm (31.5in)
*1
Roll media
Thickness 1.0 mm (0.04in) maximum
Roll outside diameter
Paper media: Φ250mm (9.8in) maximum
Other media: Φ210mm (8.3in) maximum
Roll weight 40 kg (88.2lb) maximum
Roll inside diameter 2 or 3 inches
The side to be printed Inside/outside
Roll end treatment The roll end is gently fixed to the core with weak-adhesive tape or weak glue for easy removal.
• Use the recommended media.
Use the media recommended by MIMAKI to ensure reliable, high-quality printing.
• Note that the media can shrink or stretch.
Do not use media immediately after unpacking. The media can shrink or stretch due to room temperature and humidity. 
After unpacking the media, leave it in the place where the media is to be used for at least 30 minutes before installing it in 
the machine.
• Do not use curled media.
Using curled media can cause paper jamming. When rolling regular-sized coated media for storage, make sure that the 
coated side is facing outward.
• Dust may be accumulated on the edge of the media.
Depending on the roll you are using, the dust inside the package may be gathered on the edge surface of the roll. Using 
dusty media can cause nozzle missing or ink drops that can lead to degraded printing quality. Remember to remove the 
dust on the edge surface of the roll before installing it on the machine.





1-18
Chapter 1 Before Use
Menu Mode
This machine has four modes. Each menu mode is described below.
NOT-READY mode
The machine is in this mode before the detection of the media.
LOCAL mode
In this mode, the machine is getting ready for printing.
All the keys are effective.
Although the machine can receive data from the computer, it does not perform printing yet.
During LOCAL mode, you can perform the following operations:
• Press the JOG keys to set a print origin and a print width.
• You can check the remaining ink levels, cartridge error details, model name, firmware version, and so on
by pressing the [Enter] key.
MENU mode
The MENU mode is activated if you press the [FUNC1] button during LOCAL mode. During MENU mode, you can set
various functions.
REMOTE mode
In this mode, the machine prints the received data.

width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
PRE PRINT
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LO CA L

Screen display during LOCAL mode
The detected media width is 
displayed.
The detected ink levels 
(approximate) are displayed.
Function buttons
The functions assigned to
[FUNC1], [FUNC2], and
[FUNC3] are displayed.
[SEL] key [FUNC1], [FUNC2], and [FUNC3]
You can change functions by pressing the [SEL] button.





This chapter
describes procedures and setting methods for ink and media preparation, and printing.
Printing Procedure  ........................................2-2
Turning the Power On/Off .............................2-3
Turning the Power On  ................................. 2-3
Turning the Power Off  ................................. 2-3
Setting Media  ................................................2-4
Adjusting the Head Height  .......................... 2-4
Adjusting the Positions of the Pinch Rollers to 
Suit the Media  ............................................. 2-5
Maximum Print/Cut Area  ........................... 2-10
Precautions on Setting the Media  ............. 2-10
Setting a Roll Media  .................................. 2-11
Setting the Pinch Roller Pressure  ............. 2-13
Take-up Device  ......................................... 2-14
Setting Leaf Media  .................................... 2-15
Changing the printing origin  ...................... 2-16
Test Printing ................................................2-17
Test Printing  .............................................. 2-17
Perform test printing with the normal test 
pattern  ....................................................... 2-18
Perform test printing with the test pattern for 
checking white ink  ..................................... 2-18
Head Cleaning  ............................................2-19
About Head Cleaning  ................................ 2-19
Perform head cleaning depending on the test 
printing result ............................................. 2-19
Setting Media Correction .............................2-19
Setting of Media Correction  .......................2-19
If the Positions of Dots Shift...  .....................2-20
Printing Data  ...............................................2-20
Starting a Printing Operation  .....................2-20
Cancel printing (Data Clear)  ......................2-21
Cutting Media  ..............................................2-21
Workflow of cutting ......................................2-22
Installing Tools  ............................................2-23
When a Cutter Is Used  ..............................2-23
How to Install a Ballpoint Pen ....................2-24
Setting the Cutting Conditions .....................2-26
About the Cut Conditions ...........................2-26
Select the Tool Condition ...........................2-27
Set the Cut Conditions ...............................2-27
Test Cutting .................................................2-28
Cutting Data  ................................................2-29
Setting the Origin .......................................2-29
Start Cutting ...............................................2-29
Stopping a Cutting Operation 
(Data Clear)  ...............................................2-29
Removing the Cutter Unit Temporarily  ......2-29
Cutting Media  ..............................................2-30
Chapter 2
Basic Operations





Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2-2
Printing Procedure

Turning the Power On/Off
See "Turning the Power On/Off" ( P.2-3).

Setting Media
See "Setting Media" ( P.2-4).

Test Printing
See "Test Printing" ( P.2-17).

Head Cleaning
See "Head Cleaning" ( P.2-19).

Printing Data
See "Printing Data" ( P.2-20).





2-3
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Turning the Power On/
Off
Turning the Power On
This machine has two power switches.
Main power switch:
This switch is located on the side of the machine. This
switch must always be on.
[END/POWER] button: 
Normally, use this button to turn the power on or off. As
long  as  the  main  power  switch  is  on,  the  machine
periodically  turns  on  to  activate  the  function  that
prevents  ink  sedimentation,  even  when  the  [END/
POWER] button is turned off.
1
Turn the main power switch on.
• Press the main power switch located on the side
of the machine to the "I" position.
• The firmware version is displayed when the power
is turned on, and the initial operation begins.
2
Press  the    button  to  turn  the
power on.
• The machine enters LOCAL mode.
3
Turn  on  the  computer  connected  with  the
machine.
Turning the Power Off
After  using  the  printer,  press  the  [END/POWER]  key  to
turn off the power.
Before turning the power off, confirm the following:
• If the machine is receiving data from the computer or if
there is any data that has not been output yet
• If the head has returned to the capping station
• If any error has occurred ( P.6-7Error messages
)
1
Turn  off  the  computer  connected  with the
machine.
2
Hold down  the   button  to turn
the power off.
• Do not turn off the main power switch on the side
of the machine.
• The next time you use this machine, just press the
[END/POWER] button.
Precautions on turning the power off
 Do not turn the main power switch off.
As long as the main power switch is on, the machine
periodically  turns  on  to  activate  the  function  that
prevents ink sedimentation.
When the main power switch is off, this function does
not work, which can cause nozzle clogging.
 Keep  the  front  cover  and  the  maintenance
cover closed.
When  these  covers  are  open,  the  function  that
prevents ink sedimentation does not work.
 Check  the  position of  the  head,  and  then turn
the power off.
If you turn the power off without the head returned to
the capping station, the ink head dries up, causing the
nozzles to become clogged.
Thus,  if  you  have  turned  the  power  off  without  the
head  returned  to  the  capping  station,  turn  the  power
on  again,  confirm  that  the  head  has  returned  to  the
capping station, and then turn the power off.
 Do  not  turn  the  power  off  during  printing  or
cutting.
If you do so, the head might not return to the capping
station.
 Press the [END/POWER]  button to turn off the
power,  and  then  turn  the  main  power  switch
off.
If you have to turn the main power switch off to move
the machine or  to resolve  an error  that has  occurred
on  the  machine,  first  hold  down  the  [END/POWER]
button  on  the  front  of  the  machine,  confirm  that  the
display on the operation panel has turned off, and then
turn the main power switch off.
• Close the front cover and the maintenance cover 
before turning the power on.
• Leaving the machine with the main power switch 
turned off for a prolonged period of time can cause 
the head nozzles to clog.

Main power 
switch
[END/POWER] 
button

[END/POWER] 
button





2-4
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting Media
You can use roll media and leaf media with this machine.
For  details  about  the  media  you  can  use  with  the
machine, see P.1-17 "「The Size of  Media That Can  Be
Used with This Machine」".
Adjusting the Head Height
Adjust the head height to suit the thickness of the media
you are using.
• The range of the initial head height can be adjusted by
3 levels according to the purpose of use.
• The  printing  height  varies  from  L  range  (2  mm)  to  H
range  (3  mm).  (The  print  height  is  set  to  L  range  (2
mm) at shipment.)
1
Move the carriage to the platen.
• Execute [ST.MAINTENANCE - CARRIAGE OUT]
(maintenance  function)  ( P.5-6,  steps  1  and
2).
2
Adjust  the  height-adjusting  lever  to  suit
the media.
• Adjust  the  position  of  the  lever  by  referring  to
"Adjusting lever and range".
• Be sure to set the height adjustment lever so that
the desired height display is at the top. If the lever
is in the middle, a printing error will occur.
3
Return the carriage to the station.
Adjusting lever and range
• When you set roll media on the machine, be care-
ful not to drop the media on your feet or other part 
of the body. The media is heavy and can cause 
bodily injury.
• At least two people must work together to set roll 
media on the machine, Working alone can cause 
injury to the back due to the weight of the roll 
media.
• Adjust the head height before setting the media on 
the machine. Adjusting the head height after set-
ting the media on the machine may result in jam-
ming, deterioration of the print quality or head 
damage.

Carriage

Range Head height
L range
2mm
(Factory default position)
M range 2.5mm
H range 3mm

Height-adjusting lever
It becomes the height 
of this display position.





2-5
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Adjusting the Positions of the Pinch Rollers to Suit the Media
Adjust the positions of the pinch rollers to suit the width of the media to be set.
This machine feeds the media with the pinch rollers and grit rollers for printing and cutting. The pinch rollers should be
located above the grit rollers.
How to adjust the pinch roller
Move the pinch roller unit to adjust the position of the pinch roller.
Use the pinch roller guide mark for positioning.
• When you set the media, make sure that the pinch rollers lying outside the media do not lie on top of the grit rollers below 
them.
Displace the pinch rollers lying outside the media slightly from their normal positions, as shown in illustration "X" under 
"How to adjust the pinch roller". Operating the machine with the media not gripped between the pinch rollers and the grit 
rollers could wear the pinch roller out.

Pinch roller
Grit roller

Pinch roller guide mark
To  adjust  the  pinch  roller
from the front side:
To adjust the pinch roller 
from the rear side:
Pinch roller unit (top view)
Adjust the pinch roller so that the triangle mark comes between the pinch roller guide 
marks.
Pinch roller unit (rear side)





2-6
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Media size and grit rollers (UCJV300/150-160)
The grit rollers to be used vary depending on the size of the media.
• To feed the media smoothly, select the appropriate grid roller positions so that the media can be held at equally spaced 
intervals.
• When the grid rollers to be used are determined, adjust the pinch roller unit by referring to “P.2-5 「How to adjust the pinch 
roller」".
• You can use any number of pinch roller units from 2 to 7.
• The pinch rollers at the left and right ends of the media must be located within 10 cm and 2 cm of the ends of the media, 
respectively. If they are positioned further from the ends of the media, some part of the media remains uncut.

1577 ~ 1620mm1577 ~ 1620mm
1446 ~ 1514mm1446 ~ 1514mm
1212 ~ 1272mm1212 ~ 1272mm
1032 ~ 1092mm1032 ~ 1092mm
732 ~ 792mm732 ~ 792mm
576 ~ 644mm576 ~ 644mm
364 ~ 424mm364 ~ 424mm
241 ~ 301mm241 ~ 301mm
1501 ~ 1561mm1501 ~ 1561mm
1370 ~ 1438mm1370 ~ 1438mm
1136 ~ 1196mm1136 ~ 1196mm
956 ~ 1016mm956 ~ 1016mm
656 ~ 716mm656 ~ 716mm
500 ~ 568mm500 ~ 568mm
288 ~ 348mm288 ~ 348mm
165 ~ 225mm165 ~ 225mm
1413 ~ 1473mm1413 ~ 1473mm
1284 ~ 1350mm1284 ~ 1350mm
1048 ~ 1108mm1048 ~ 1108mm
868 ~ 928mm868 ~ 928mm
568 ~ 628mm568 ~ 628mm
414 ~ 480mm414 ~ 480mm
200 ~ 260mm200 ~ 260mm
85 ~ 137mm85 ~ 137mm
GR1GR1
GR2GR2GR4GR4
GR3GR3
GR11GR11 GR10GR10 GR5GR5GR6GR6GR7GR7GR8GR8GR9GR9

Determine the grid rollers to be used according to the 
size of the media.
The right end of the media 
should come within this 
range.
GR: Grit roller





2-7
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Media size and grit rollers (UCJV300-130)
The grit rollers to be used vary depending on the size of the media.
• To feed the media smoothly, select the appropriate grid roller positions so that the media can be held at equally spaced 
intervals.
• When the grid rollers to be used are determined, adjust the pinch roller unit by referring to “P.2-5 「How to adjust the pinch 
roller」".
• You can use any number of pinch roller units from 2 to 6.
• The pinch rollers at the left and right ends of the media must be located within 10 cm and 2 cm of the ends of the media, 
respectively. If they are positioned further from the ends of the media, some part of the media remains uncut.

1328 ~ 1371mm1328 ~ 1371mm
1212 ~ 1272mm1212 ~ 1272mm
1032 ~ 1092mm1032 ~ 1092mm
732 ~ 792mm732 ~ 792mm
576 ~ 644mm576 ~ 644mm
362 ~ 422mm362 ~ 422mm
241 ~ 301mm241 ~ 301mm
1252 ~ 1312mm1252 ~ 1312mm
1136 ~ 1196mm1136 ~ 1196mm
956 ~ 1016mm956 ~ 1016mm
656 ~ 716mm656 ~ 716mm
500 ~ 568mm500 ~ 568mm
286 ~ 346mm286 ~ 346mm
165 ~ 225mm165 ~ 225mm
1164 ~ 1224mm1164 ~ 1224mm
1048 ~ 1108mm1048 ~ 1108mm
868 ~ 928mm868 ~ 928mm
568 ~ 628mm568 ~ 628mm
414 ~ 480mm414 ~ 480mm
198 ~ 258mm198 ~ 258mm
85 ~ 137mm85 ~ 137mm
GR1GR1
GR2GR2GR4GR4
GR3GR3
GR10GR10 GR5GR5GR6GR6GR7GR7GR8GR8GR9GR9

Determine the grid rollers to be used according to 
the size of the media.
The right end of the media should 
come within this range.
GR: Grit roller





2-8
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Media size and grit rollers (UCJV300-107)
The grit rollers to be used vary depending on the size of the media.
• To feed the media smoothly, select the appropriate grid roller positions so that the media can be held at equally spaced 
intervals.
• When the grid rollers to be used are determined, adjust the pinch roller unit by referring to “P.2-5 「How to adjust the pinch 
roller」".
• You can use any number of pinch roller units from 2 to 5.
• The pinch rollers at the left and right ends of the media must be located within 10 cm and 2 cm of the ends of the media, 
respectively. If they are positioned further from the ends of the media, some part of the media remains uncut.

1043 ~ 1100mm
900 ~ 960mm
732 ~ 792mm
576 ~ 644mm
362 ~ 422mm
241 ~ 301mm
967 ~ 1027mm
824 ~ 884mm
656 ~ 716mm
500 ~ 568mm
288 ~ 348mm
165 ~ 225mm
879 ~ 939mm
736 ~ 796mm
568 ~ 628mm
414 ~ 480mm
200 ~ 260mm
85 ~ 137mm
1043 ~ 1100mm
900 ~ 960mm
732 ~ 792mm
576 ~ 644mm
362 ~ 422mm
241 ~ 301mm
967 ~ 1027mm
824 ~ 884mm
656 ~ 716mm
500 ~ 568mm
288 ~ 348mm
165 ~ 225mm
879 ~ 939mm
736 ~ 796mm
568 ~ 628mm
414 ~ 480mm
200 ~ 260mm
85 ~ 137mm
GR1GR1
GR2GR2GR4GR4
GR3GR3
GR5GR5GR6GR6GR7GR7GR8GR8GR9GR9

Determine the grid rollers to be used 
according to the size of the media.
The right end of the media should come 
within this range.
GR: Grit roller





2-9
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Media size and grit rollers (UCJV300-75)
The grit rollers to be used vary depending on the size of the media.
• To feed the media smoothly, select the appropriate grid roller positions so that the media can be held at equally spaced 
intervals.
• When the grid rollers to be used are determined, adjust the pinch roller unit by referring to “P.2-5 「How to adjust the pinch 
roller」".
• You can use any number of pinch roller units from 2 to 4.
• The pinch rollers at the left and right ends of the media must be located within 10 cm and 2 cm of the ends of the media, 
respectively. If they are positioned further from the ends of the media, some part of the media remains uncut.

777 ~ 810mm
962 ~ 752mm
578~ 638mm
364 ~ 424mm
241 ~ 301mm
691 ~ 751mm
616 ~ 676mm
502 ~ 582mm
288 ~ 348mm
165 ~ 225mm
603 ~ 663mm
528 ~ 588mm
414 ~ 474mm
200 ~ 260mm
86 ~ 137mm
777 ~ 810mm
962 ~ 752mm
578~ 638mm
364 ~ 424mm
241 ~ 301mm
691 ~ 751mm
616 ~ 676mm
502 ~ 582mm
288 ~ 348mm
165 ~ 225mm
603 ~ 663mm
528 ~ 588mm
414 ~ 474mm
200 ~ 260mm
86 ~ 137mm
GR1GR1
GR2GR2GR4GR4
GR3GR3
GR5GR5GR6GR6
GR7GR7
GR8GR8

Determine the grid rollers 
to be used according to 
the size of the media.
The right end of the media should come 
within this range.
GR: Grit roller





2-10
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Maximum Print/Cut Area
The maximum printable area or cut area varies, depending on the position of the media width ( P.2-6) and the origin
position ( P.2-16).
The area other than that is the dead space that cannot be printed/cut.
Precautions on Setting the Media
Setting position of the media
Set the media such that the right end of the media lies within the area shown in the following figure:
The end of the media should not lie beyond the slit line on the platen.
UCJV300/150-160 UCJV300-130 UCJV300-107 UCJV300-75
Maximum printing/cut width 1610mm (63.4in) 1361mm (53.6in) 1090mm (41.7in) 800mm (31.5in)

Set the media such that the right end of the media lies within the 
area indicated by the arrows (within the first three grit rollers 
from the right end on the front of the machine).

Media
Media press
Slit line





2-11
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting a Roll Media
Attach a roll media to the roll media hanger located on the
back of the machine.
1
Confirm that the clamp lever is lowered.
2
Move the left roll holder to the roll setting
position.
• Loosen the roll holder fixing screw and move the
roll holder.
• Check the size of the media and where to set the
media  by  referring  to  the  section  applicable  to
your machine (P.2-6).
3
Tighten the roll holder fixing screw on the
left side.
• Recheck steps 1 and 2.
4
Push the core of the roll media into the left
side of the roll holder.
• Push the roll media all the way into the roll holder
until it is held steady.
5
Loosen the screw at the right side of the
roll  holder  and  insert  the  holder  into  the
core of the roll media.
6
Pull up the clamp lever located on the back
of the machine.
7
Insert the roll media into the machine.
• Slightly tilt  the  media  so  that  it  can  be  smoothly
inserted  into  the  machine  without  catching  on
anything.
(1) Pull the media all the way out to the front end 
of the platen.
(2) Insert the media between the platen and the 
pinch rollers.
• Pull  the  media  out  of  the  roll  so  that  the
media  can  be  grasped  from  the  front  of  the
machine.
(3) Push down the clamp lever located on the 
back of the machine.
• This holds the media in place.
• Be careful not to drop the media on your feet or 
other part of your body while attaching it to the roll 
media hanger. The media is heavy and can cause 
bodily injury.

Roll holder side (the back of the machine)
This is where the end of the set 
media should be when the media 
has a 2-inch core.
This is where the end of the set media 
should be when the media has a 3-inch core.
The reference position of the roll holder 
must come between the pinch roller 
guide marks.

• Set up the pinch roller unit such that the media is 
held in place by equally-spaced pinch rollers. If the 
pinch rollers holding the media in place are not 
equally spaced, start over from step 1.
• Provide a dead space of at least 5 mm at both 
ends of the media.





2-12
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
8
Pull out the roll media.
(1) Open the front cover.
(2) Pull up the clamp lever from the front of the 
machine.
(3) Gently pull out the roll media until you feel 
slight resistance.
9
Confirm that the roll media is evenly pulled
out, and then lower the clamp lever.
• Pulling  several  positions  of  the  media  lightly,
lower  the  clamp  lever  after  confirming  that  the
amount  of  the  roll  media  pulled  out  is  almost
even.
10
Hold the media with the media press 
gently.
• When using thick media, remove the media press
from the media before printing.
• You do not have to use the media press to cut the
media.
11
Set an empty core of the roll media on the
take-up device.
12
Press   and then select "ROLL".
• The media width is detected.
• When  [MEDIA  DETECT]  (one  of  the  machine
settings) is set to "MANUAL" ( P.3-15), media
width will not be automatically detected. Enter the
media  width  by  referring  to  P.2-13  "Setting  the
manual media width".
13
When the media width detection is 
complete, use   to enter the 
number of the pinch rollers you are using.
• When  the  pinch  roller  number  in  "MEDIA
DETECT"  of  the  machine  setup  is  set  to  OFF
( P.3-15),  the  screen  to  enter  the  number  of
pinch rollers is not displayed. Proceed to the Step
16.
14
Press the   key.
• When  [MEDIA  RESIDUAL]  (one  of  the  machine
settings)  is  set  to  "ON”  ( P.3-15),  you  can
display  the  remaining  media  entry  screen  by
pressing the [Enter] key. ( P.2-13)

Media press

• When installing the media, make sure that the 
right edge of the media is placed on the left side 
with respect to the slit line on the platen. Placing 
the media rightward of the slit line will make it rise 
up if it moves obliquely, and this could cause dam-
age to the head.
• If a media is misaligned to the right of the standard 
position, an error message “MEDIA SET POSI-
TION R” is displayed after detecting the media. 
Set the media again.

Media
Media 
press
Slit line

Core
Take-up 
device





2-13
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
15
Fix the media to the take-up device.
(1) By pressing [], feed the media until it 
reaches the core of the take-up device.
(2) Fix the middle of the media with adhesive 
tape.
(3) In the same manner, fix the left side and right 
side of the media.
• Make  sure  that  the  there  is  no  slack  or
wrinkle  on  the  media  in  such  condition  that
the roll media is pulled to right and left evenly,
and stick the tape.
(4) Press the [ENTER] key
Setting the Pinch Roller Pressure
After  setting  the  media  in  place,  set  the  pressure  to  be
applied to the pinch rollers that retain the media.
Setting an inappropriate pressure for the pinch rollers can
cause  not  only  the  media  to  become  skewed  during
printing or cutting but also the pinch rollers to leave traces
on the media.
The set pressure must be appropriate to the media set on
the machine.
You  can  set  the  following  items  in  pinch  roller  pressure
settings:
1
Press    twice  in  LOCAL,  and  then
press the  (PR) key
2
Press    to  select  a  setting  item,
and then press the   key.
3
Press   to select a setting.
4
Press  .
5
Press   to finish.
Entering the media remaining amount
When [MEDIA  REMAIN] of the machine setting is set
to “ON” 
( P.3-15), the screen for entering the media
length is displayed after detecting the media width.
1
The input media length screen is 
displayed.
2
Press   to enter the media 
remaining amount.
3
Press the   key.
Setting the manual media width
When  [MEDIA  DETECT]  of  the  machine  setup  is
"MANUAL"  ( P.3-15),  set  the  media  width  with  the
following method.
1
The right edge position screen is 
displayed.
2
Press   to enter the right edge 
position of the media.
3
Press the   key.
• Next, the screen to enter the left edge position of
the media is displayed.
4
Press   to enter the left edge 
position of the media.
5
Press the   key.
Item Setting Description
NUMBER 
FOR USE
1 ~ 7
Set the number of the pinch 
rollers you are using.
This number differs depending 
on the model you are using.
PRINT
LOW/ MID/ 
HIGH
Set the pinch roller pressure for 
printing.
CUT: ENDS
LOW/ MID/ 
HIGH
Set the pressure of the edge 
pinch rollers (left and right 
edges) used when cutting the 
media.
CUT: INNER
OFF/ LOW/ 
MID/ HIGH
Set the pressure of the pinch 
rollers except for the edge pinch 
rollers used when cutting the 
media.
CHANGE 
EXECUTION
PRINT/ CUT
Switch between the setting for 
printing and cutting.

50.0m
LENGTH
PRINT
INPUT MEDIA LENGTH

***.*0.0
PRINT
RIGHT EDGE POSITION
30°/35°

***.*0.0
PRINT
LEFT EDGE POSITION





2-14
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
About the media residual print
When [MEDIA RESIDUAL] of the maintenance function is
"ON"  ( P.3-15),  you  can  print  the  current  date  and
media remaining amount.
1
In LOCAL mode, press  .
• The machine enters the origin setting mode.
2
Press the   key.
• Appear  the  confirmation  screen  of  media
remaining print.
3
Press the   key.
• Media residual print starts.
Take-up Device
With the switch of the narrow  take-up device,  select  the
take-up direction of the media or others.
Setting the torque limiter
The take-up device is provided with a torque limiter. The
take-up  torque  can  be  adjusted  with  the  torque  limiter.
(The torque limiter is set to "media" at delivery.)
If  the  tension  is  too  strong  to  use  thin  media,  lower  the
take-up torque.
Clockwise turn: Increases torque (For a heavy
and  thicker  media  such  as
tarpaulin or the like)
Counterclockwise turn: Decreases  torque  (For  light
media)
When not using taking-up device
• Be careful not to set the position beyond the media 
range, as doing so may cause printing or cutting 
outside the media.
Direction selector 
switch
UP
 (REVERSE)
The take-up device winds the 
media with the printed side 
facing in.
DOWN
 
(FORWARD)
The take-up device winds the 
media with the printed side 
facing out.
ON/OFF button
This button enables or 
disables take-up operation. (If 
you press this button and 
enable take-up operation, the 
operation continues until you 
press the button again.) 
*1
*1. You can also change the setting so that the taking-up operation only
lasts while the ON/OFF button is being pressed. For details, refer to
"Setting of Take-up Unit" ( P.3-14).

ON/OFF button
Direction selector switch

• When performing printing or cutting of 700 mm or 
more without using the taking-up device, evacuate 
the taking-up device to right and left. The quality of 
the print and cut may become low because of the 
impact when the front end of the media touches 
the taking-up device.

50% of the maximum 
torque
100% of the maximum 
torque
Scale of the torque
Adjustment nut





2-15
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting Leaf Media
Unlike roll media, leaf media does not need to be retained
with the roll holders.
1
Raise the clamp lever.
2
Insert  the  leaf  media  between  the  platen
and the pinch rollers.
3
To print, hold the media with the media
press gently.
• When using thick media, remove the media press
from the media before printing.
• You do not have to use the media press to cut the
media.
4
Push down the clamp lever.
• Set the media straight.
5
Press the   key.
6
Press   and select "LEAF".
7
The media detection is started.
(1) The media width is detected.
(2) The media is fed then the rear end of media 
is detected.
(3) It returns to the Local when the detection is 
completed.
• Set up the pinch rollers such that the media is held 
in place by equally-spaced pinch rollers. If the 
pinch rollers holding the media in place are not 
equally spaced, start over from step 2.
• Provide a dead space of at least 5 mm at both 
ends of the media.

Clamp lever

Pinch roller

Media press

• The media must lie on the black part of the "after 
cover", with at least 40 mm of the media lying off 
the edge of the black part. If it is shorter than that, 
it may not be able to perform the media detection.
• After setting the media in place, set the pinch roller 
pressure, referring to P.2-13 "Setting the Pinch 
Roller Pressure".

Media
Approximately 40 mm
After Cover





2-16
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Notes when using media press
Changing the printing origin
The position of the printing origin can be changed.
Move  the  LED  pointer  to  the  changing  position  and
deciding the position.
1
In LOCAL mode, press  .
• It enters into the origin setting mode.
2
By  pressing  ,  align  the
light spot of the LED pointer with the new
printing origin you want to set.
•Use [][][][]  to  move  the  carriage  and  the
media and select a new printing origin.
3
After  determining  the  origin,  press  the
key.
• The printing origin is changed.
Typical setting position of printing origin
The printing origin in the depth direction (X') is positioned
at about 75 mm rearward from the slot for cutting on the
platen.
The  printing  origin  in  the  scanning  direction  (Y')  is
positioned at 15 mm from the right end of the media. The
value in the scanning direction (Y') can be changed using
[MARGIN]  in FUNCTION  mode  ( P.3-8).  This  can  be
changed by using the Jog key.
• When installing the media, make sure that the 
right edge of the media is placed on the left side 
with respect to the slit line on the platen. Placing 
the media rightward of the slit line will make it rise 
up if it moves obliquely, and this could cause dam-
age to the head.
• If a media is misaligned to the right of the standard 
position, an error message “MEDIA SET POSI-
TION R” is displayed.

Media
Media 
press
Slit line

X
0.0
Y
0.0
SET ORIGIN

Cutting slot
approx. 75 mm (X’)
15 mm 
(Y’)





2-17
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Test Printing
Print a test pattern to check that there are no discharging
defects such as nozzle clogging (slight touching of ink or
nozzle missing).
Relationship between head row and test 
pattern
The  relations  between  head  row  and  test  pattern  print
position are as follow.
About test patterns
This machine provides you two test patterns.
 Normal test pattern (when using ink other than
white ink)
When you use ink that you can check by printing a test
pattern on a white media, print this test pattern.
 Test pattern for checking white ink
When  you  use  a  white  media  and  wish  to  check
discharging status of white ink, print this test pattern.
Note on test printing
Test Printing
Print a test pattern to check that there are no discharging
defects such as nozzle clogging (slight touching of ink or
nozzle missing).
In  addition,  you  can  select  the  orientation  of  the  test
pattern  to  print  from  two  types  in  order  to  perform  test
printing repeatedly. Select one depending on your use.
• When using leaf media, set a media of more than 
A3 size put horizontally. If a media with narrow 
width is set, printing will only be conducted to mid-
way.
• When using a roll media, rewind the media by 
hand before printing so that it is not loose. When 
the roll media has not been rewound tightly, it may 
cause image quality to deteriorate.

Media feed direction
Test pattern
Head

Check before test printing.
• If media has been set P.2-4
• If the origin position has been set
• If the head gap has been adjusted P.2-4

Media-feeding direction
: When the set value is "FEED DIR."
: When the set value is "SCAN DIR."





2-18
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Perform test printing with the normal
test pattern
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (TEST 
PRINT/CLEANING)
, and then the   
key.
• The test print menu appears.
• You can change the orientation of the test pattern
by pressing [][]. The orientation you set here
will  also  be  applied  the  next  time  you  perform
printing.
• When  performing  test  printing  after  having
changed  the  orientation  from  "SCAN  DIR."  to
"FEED DIR.", the line is fed to the position of the
first test printing, and then printed.
2
Press the   key.
• Test printing starts.
3
Check the printed test pattern.
• When the result is normal, end the operation.
• When  the  result  is  abnormal,  perform  head
cleaning. ( P.2-19)
Perform  test  printing  with  the  test
pattern for checking white ink
It  makes  easier  to  check  if  print  the  background  to  the
white ink locations in the pattern.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
  (TEST
PRINT/CLEANING)
,  and  then  the 
key.
• The test print menu appears.
2
Press    and  select  "SpotColor
Check".
3
Press the   key.
• Print a test pattern in the following orders.
(1) Print the pattern daubed with black.
(2) Return the media automatically and print the 
test pattern.
4
Check the printed test pattern.
• When the result is normal, end the operation.
• When  the  result  is  abnormal,  perform  head
cleaning. ( P.2-19)

Abnormal pattern
Clogged with ink
Normal pattern
Nozzles are dirty

Abnormal pattern
Clogged with ink
Normal pattern
Nozzles are dirty





2-19
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Head Cleaning
About Head Cleaning
Check the printed test pattern result and perform cleaning
depending on the status.
Select one from the four types below:
NORMAL: When any line is missing
SOFT : When only head wiping is needed (when lines
are bent)
HARD : When poor image quality cannot be improved
even by NORMAL or SOFT cleaning
ULTRA : When poor image quality cannot be improved
even  by  HARD  cleaning,  or  when  the  color
does not improve.
Perform head cleaning depending on
the test printing result
There  are  four  types  of  head  cleaning.  Use  appropriate
one for the test result.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press   
(TEST
PRINT/CLEANING)
 .
• The cleaning menu appears.
2
Press   to select a cleaning type.
3
Press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  the  head  to  be
cleaned, and then press 
 ()
.
• After  selecting  the head, press  the  [FUNC2] key
and put a check in the check box.
The  head  whose  box  has  been  checked  will  be
cleaned.
• To  have  both  head  1  and head  2  cleaned,  put a
check in both their check boxes.
5
Press the   key.
6
Perform test printing again, and check the
result.
• Repeat the cleaning and the test printing until the
printing result becomes normal.
Setting Media Correc-
tion
Correct  the  media  feed  amount  to  match  the  type  of
media you are using.
If  the  correction  value  is  not  appropriate,  stripes  may
appear  on  the  printed  image,  thus  resulting  in  a  poor
printing.
Setting of Media Correction
A  pattern  for  media  correction  is  printed  and  a  media-
feeding rate is corrected.
1
Set the media on the machine. ( P.2-4)
2
In  LOCAL  mode,  press  the    key,
and then press 
 (ADJUST)
.
• The adjustment menu appears.
3
Press  the    key  twice  to  print  a
correction pattern.
4
Check  the  correction  pattern  and  enter  a
correction value.
• A screen for entering the correction value will be
displayed.
• Enter a correction value in "+":
The boundary between the two bands is widened.
• Enter a correction value in "-":
The  boundary  between  the  two  bands  is
narrowed.
• When  you  change  the  correction  value  by  "30",
the width of  the boundary changes by  about 0.1
mm.
When the image quality is not improved after the 
head cleaning.
• Clean the wiper and ink cap. ( P.5-6)
• Wash the head nozzle. ( P.5-9)
• On completion of [MEDIA COMP.] during use of 
roll media, the media returns to the printing origin. 
Then the roll media in the rear of this machine will 
slacken.
Before printing, take up the slack in the roll media 
by hand; loose roll media can result in an inferior 
image quality.
• When printing with a take-up device, set the media 
first and perform media correction.
• Two bands are printed in the correction pattern.
• Make adjustment so that an even color density is 
obtained in the boundary between the two bands.

Second band
First band
Media feed direction





2-20
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
If the Positions of Dots
Shift...
When the condition for printing (media thickness/ink type/
etc.) has  been  changed,  perform the  following  operation
to  correct  the  ink  drop  position  for  bi-directional  (Bi)
printing and obtain the proper printing result.
Example of a printed pattern
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press  the    key,
and then press 
 (ADJUST)
.
• The adjustment menu appears.
2
Press   and then the   key.
• "DROP.POScorrect" will be selected.
3
Press the   key.
• Printing  of  the  Drop  position  correct  printed
pattern will start.
• Multiple  test  patterns  are  printed.  (The  printed
patterns  are  called  Pattern  1,  Pattern  2,  Pattern
3... in the order of printing.)
4
Press   to enter a correction value
of Pattern 1, and press the   key.
• Corrected feeding rate: -40 to 40
• Check  the  test  patterns.  The  position  where  an
outward  feeding  line  and  a  return  feeding  line
become one straight line is the correction value.
• When the correction value in not between -40 and
40,  adjust  the  height  of  the  printing  heads  and
perform the operations in Step 2 and later.
5
In  the  same  way  as  in  Step  4,  enter  a
correction value of Pattern 2 and later, and
press the   key.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Printing Data
Starting a Printing Operation
1
Set the media on the machine. ( P.2-4)
2
Press the   (REMOTE) key in LOCAL.
• The  screen  changes  to  REMOTE,  and  data can
be received from the PC.
3
Transmit data to be printed from the PC.
• For  the  method  of  data  transmission,  see  the
instruction manual for the RIP software.
4
Start printing.
• The  printing  speed  may  change,  depending  on
the  width  of  the  set  media or  the position  of  the
print origin  even  when the  same data is  printed.
This is because of a difference in resolution.
• When using leaf media, set a media of more than 
A3 size put horizontally. If a media with narrow 
width is set, printing will be only conducted to mid-
way.

The dots at the fourth position 
counted from the zero position in 
the positive direction form a straight 
line.
In this case, the dot position 
correction value is 4.0.
Output 

• When using a roll media, rewind the media by 
hand before printing so that it is not loose. When 
the roll media has not been rewound tightly, it may 
cause image quality to deteriorate.

0.0m
600x600    16p / Bi / Hi / Vd
PRINT
REMOTE
30°/35°

Resolution
300/600/900/1200 DPI
Number of passes
The length of media printed
Scan direction
Uni: Unidirectional
Bi: Bidirectional
Scanning speed
Std: Standard speed
Hi: Double speed
Data type
Vd: 
Variable data
Nd: Normal data





2-21
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Pause printing
Perform the following operation when pausing printing.
1
Press 
 (LOCAL)
 during printing.
• Pause the printing operation
• Interrupt data sending  at  the  PC  side  during  the
data is sent from the PC.
• Press the [REMOTE] key to resume printing.
Cancel printing (Data Clear)
If  you  want  to  cancel  printing  the  received  data,  select
DATA CLEAR.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press  the    key,
Press 
 (DATA CLEAR)
.
2
Press the   key.
• The received data is erased then it returns to the
Local.
Cutting Media
By using the keys on the operation panel, you can cut the
media at any position.
1
In LOCAL mode, press  .
• It enters into the origin setting mode.
• By  pressing  [],  feed  the  media  to  the  cutting
position.
2
Press the   key.
• The media is cut.
• When the cutting has been completed, the current
mode returns to LOCAL.
• Do not perform data clear during data transmis-
sion.
• Received data is stored in the receiving buffer 
even after data clear.

X
0.0
Y
0.0
SET ORIGIN





2-22
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Workflow of cutting

Turning the Power On/Off
See "Turning the Power On/Off" ( P.2-3).

Setting Media
See "Setting Media" ( P.2-4).

Installing Tools
See "Installing Tools" ( P.2-23).

Setting the Cutting Conditions
See "Setting the Cutting Conditions" ( P.2-
26).

Test Cutting
See "Test Cutting" ( P.2-28).

Cutting Data
See "Cutting Data" ( P.2-29).





2-23
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Installing Tools
You can use the following tools with this machine:
Cutter:
This tool is selected when an image printed on a media
is cut or when letters are cut with a cutting media.
Pen (water-based ballpoint pen):
This tool is used to perform "test printing" for checking
how images or letters are actually cut.
When a Cutter Is Used
How to install a cutter
1
Remove  the  cap  located  at  the  edge  by
rotating  it,  and  replace  the  cutter  with  a
new one using tweezers or the like.
2
Turn  the  adjusting  knob  to  adjust  the
protruding amount of the cutter.
• Turn the adjusting knob in the direction indicated
by the  arrow  in the figure  below  to  bring out the
cutter  blade.  (With  each  turn  of  the  adjusting
knob, the cutter blade advances 0.5 mm.)
Adjusting the protrusion of the cutter 
blade
Adjust  the  cutter  blade  according  to  the  types  of  the
cutters and the sheet for use.
After adjusting the blade edge, set  the cut condition and
perform  test  cut  to  check  whether  cutting  is  performed
well.
For  the  cutter  supplied  with  the  unit,  the  protruding
amount  of  the  blade  can  be  adjusted  with  the  cutter
attached to the tool holder.
1
Turn  the  adjusting  knob  to  adjust  the
protruding amount of the cutter blade.
• You can bring out the cutter blade by turning the
adjusting knob clockwise.
(With each  turn of  the  adjusting knob, the  cutter
blade advances 0.5 mm.)
• Do not touch the cutter with your fingers.
Sharp cutter tip may injure you.
• Do not shake the tool after having set the cut-
ter.
Otherwise, the blade edge may pop out, causing 
you to get injured.
• Keep the cutter out of reach of children. Dispose of 
the used cutter blade in compliance with the appli-
cable regulations.

Cutter holder
Cutter
Cap

Cutter
Adjusting knob

• Take care not to protrude the blade too much. If 
the cutter is used with its blade excessively pro-
truded, the cutter can cut out the base paper, thus 
damaging the machine.
• If you are using a cutter other than the one sup-
plied with the machine, refer to 
P.5-22 "Adjusting 
blade edge of cutters other than supplied one" 
for information about how to adjust the cutter 
blade.





2-24
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Protruding amount of the cutter blade
How to install the cutter holder
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
 (>>)
 .
• The cutting menu appears.
2
Press  , select "TOOL REPLACE",
and then press the   key.
• The  cutter  unit  moves  to  the  left  end  of  the
machine.
3
Rotate the knob to loosen the holder 
presser.
4
Insert the cutter holder into the tool holder.
• Push the brim of the cutter holder against the tool
holder.
• Press the brim of the cutter holder with the holder
presser.
5
Fix the cutter holder.
• Turn the knob of the tool holder clockwise, and fix
it securely.
6
Press the   key.
How to Install a Ballpoint Pen
1
Put the cap on the pen adapter.
• Use the cap to adjust the pen height.
• Install the cutter holder to the tool holder of the 
carriage.Be sure to insert the cutter holder all the 
way in the tool holder.

Amount of cutting=
For reference: the protruding amount of the cutter blade =
0.2 to 0.5 mm
(Replace the blade when it is blunt.)
• Adjust the blade pressure so that the cutter may 
leave a little bit of cutter track on the sheet.
• In case the sheet thickness is thinner than the film 
thickness, which may not provide correct cutting 
quality, change the protruding amount of the blade 
and you may get a better result.

Protruding amount
of the cutter blade
Amount of cutting
Film
Base paper

(Film thickness + Base paper 
thickness)
2
• However, When Filem is thinner than 
Base Paper

Holder presser
Knob

• Fix the cutter holder firmly. If not, accurate and 
high-quality cutting will not be achieved.
• When you want to use a commercially available 
ballpoint pen, you must use the pen of 8mm to 
9mm in diameter. Image quality may depend on 
the pen.
(Recommended ballpoint pen: the one available 
from Pentel Co., Ltd. with the product No.: K105-
A, K105-GA)
• Regarding such ballpoint pens as shown below, 
the pen inclines to touch the cover when held by 
the pen adapter. (A pen that has a contoured body 
or a pen that has a lug or uneven surface)

Brim
Holder presser

Knob

A pen that has a contoured 
body
A pen that has a lug or 
uneven surface





2-25
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
Insert the pen into the pen adapter.
• Insert the pen until the tip of the pen reaches the
cap.
3
Fix the tip of the pen.
• Tighten the fixing screw clockwise.
• Be careful not to over-tighten the fixing screw for
the  pen  adapter.  If tightened too  much, the  ball-
point pen may crack.
4
Remove the cap.
5
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
 (>>)
 .
• The cutting menu appears.
6
Press   to select "TOOL 
REPLACE", and then press the   
key.
• The  cutter  unit  moves  to  the  left  end  of  the
machine.
7
Rotate the knob to loosen the holder 
presser.
8
Insert the pen adapter with the pen into the
tool holder.
• Make  sure  that  the  brim  of  the  pen  adapter  is
rested on the tool holder.
• Set the adapter in such a way that the fixing screw
will not obstruct operation.
• Press the brim of the pen adapter with the holder
presser.
9
Turn the knob clockwise to fix the tool.
• Turn the knob of the tool holder clockwise, and fix
it securely.
10
Press the   key.

Pen
Pen adapter
Fixing screw
Cap

Holder presser
Knob

• Instead of the ballpoint pen, you can attach the 
refill that comes with it.
Follow the procedure below to attach the ballpoint 
pen refill to the pen adapter, then put it into the tool 
holder in the same way as in step 6.
(1) Insert a spring into the pen tip.
(2) While  pressing  the  cap  onto  the  spring,
attach it on the pen adapter.
• Rotate the cap to the direction indicated 
with an arrow and attach it on the pen 
adapter.
• When you replace the ballpoint pen (SPB-0726), 
contact a distributor in your district or our office to 
call for service

Insert until it is rested
Brim
Holder presser





2-26
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting the Cutting 
Conditions
You  can  register  the  cutting  speed  and  the  pressure
depending on the sheet or the tool type to be used. (Cut
condition)
About the Cut Conditions
Items you can set here
About Selecting Cutting Condition
1
Press  the    key  twice  to  display
"TOOL" 
2
Press   to display the cut condition.
• The three items shown in the following screen are
not displayed unless the half-cut is set to ON.
About half cutting
You can cut on the dotted line, not to cut sheet out. (Half
cut)
When you set half cut to valid (ON), you can use the half
cut function.
Tool condition
You can select the cutting condition No. (1 
to 7) or plotting condition (PEN).
Cut speed Setting of the speed of cutting.
Cutting 
pressure
Setting of the pressure (g) required for 
cutting.
Offset 
*1
*1. You cannot set this when "PEN" is selected in the tool condition,
Setting of the distance from the center of 
the cutter holder to the cutter blade.
Half cut 
*2
*2. The three items in the lower level are available when the half-cut is
set to ON.
Setting of enabling (ON)/disabling (OFF) 
the half-cut function.
Half cut 
press
Setting of the pressure of left part. (g)
H-leng
Setting of the length to be left (not to be 
cut). (mm)
C-leng Setting of the length to be cut. (mm)

width:1340mm
PRTOOL
TEST CUT
LOCAL

• The illustration above is the image. The shape of 
cut surface differs depending on the cutting condi-
tions.
CUT CONDITION
HALF CUT PRESSURE
80g
2.0mm
H・LENG
20mm
C・LENG
>><<
CUT CONDITION
TOOL
CUT1
30cm/s
SPEED
60g
PRESSURE
OFFSET
0.30mm
ON
HALF CUT
>><<

Cutter
Set the length to be 
left (not to be cut).
Sheet
Set the length 
to be cut.
Set the 
cutting 
pressure





2-27
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Select the Tool Condition
Before  cutting  (plotting),  select  the  tool  condition
depending on the sheet and the tool type to be used.
1
Press the   key twice to  display the
"TOOL" menu.
2
Press the (TOOL).
3
Press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  a  tool  condition
to be used.
• Each time you press [][], the tool condition is
switched as follows.
5
Cutting. ( P.2-29)
Set the Cut Conditions
Set the condition to cut or to plot with a pen.
Setting contents of cutting condition (CUT1 to 7):
Cut speed (SPEED)/ cut pressure (PRESS)/ OFFSET
value/ Half cut
Setting contents of plotting condition (PEN):
Plotting speed (SPEED)/ pen pressure (PRESS)
1
Press the   key twice to  display the
"TOOL" menu.
2
Press the   (TOOL).
3
Press  the    key,  Select  a  tool
condition  to  be  used  by  using    ,
and then press the   key.
4
Press    to  move  the  cursor  to  cutting
speed, and press the   key.
5
Press   to set the cutting speed,
and press the   key.
• Set the moving speed of the tool for cutting or pen
plotting.
• Setting values: 1  to  10  cm/s  (settable  by  1cm/s
step)
15 to  30  cm/s (settable by 5cm/s
step)
6
Press    to  move  the  cursor  to  cutting
pressure,and press the   key.
7
Press   to set the cutting pressure,
and press the   key.
• Set the  pressure  that  the  tool presses  the  sheet
for cutting or pen plotting.
• Setting values:  10 to 20 g (settable by 2 g step)
25 to 100 g (settable by 5 g step)
110 to 450 g (settable by 10 g
step)
8
Press   to move the cursor to OFFSET,
and press the   key.
9
Press   to set the offset value, and
press the   key.
• When you set  the  cutting condition  (CUT1  to 7),
set the distance between the center of the cutter
holder and the blade tip.
• Setting values:   to 250 (0.00 to 2.50 mm)
(settable by 0.05 mm step)
10
Press   to move the cursor to half cut,
and press the   key.
11
Press    to  set  ON/OFF,  and  press
the   key.
• When  you  perform  half  cut,  select  ON  and
proceed to the Step 11.
• When  you  are  not  performing  half  cut,  select
"OFF" and proceed to Step 18.
12
Press   to move the cursor to pressure
setting  of  left  part  (not  to  be  cut),  and
press the   key.
13
Press   to set pressure, and press
the   key.
• Set  the  pressure  of  the  left  part  (not  to  be  cut)
when performing half cut.
• Setting values: 0 to 300 g (settable by 5 g step)
14
Press    to  move  the  cursor  to  the
setting  of  length  to  be  left,  and  press  the
 key.
15
Press   to  move the cursor to the
setting  of  length  to  be  left,  and  press  the
 key.
• Set  the  length  to  be  left  not  to  be  cut  when
performing half cut.
• Setting values:  0.1 to 5 mm (settable by 0.1 mm
step)

CUT1 ~ 3
PEN
CUT4 ~ 7

• When the cutting (plotting) pressure setting is 
completed, proceed to the setting of the OFFSET 
value. When you set the plotting condition (PEN), 
you cannot set the OFFSET value and half cut. 
Proceed to the Step 16.
• The maximum pressure at selecting PEN is 150 g.

Cutter 
holder
OFFSET
Blade





2-28
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
16
Press   to move the cursor to the 
setting of cut length, and press the 
 key.
17
Press    to set  the  cut  length,  and
press the   key.
• Set the length to be cut when performing half cut.
• Setting values:  5 to 150 mm 
(5  to  20  mm:  1  mm  step,  20  to
150 mm: 5 mm step)
18
Press  the    key  to  register  the
set contents.
• Return to the local.
Test Cutting
Execute  test cutting  to  confirm  the tool
conditions.
In the test cutting, the machine cuts two
squares.
1
Press the   key twice  to display the
"TEST CUT" menu.
2
Press   (TEST CUT).
3
Press the   key.
• Test cutting is performed.
Change the settings of the cut conditions according to the
test cutting results.
• The set value is retained even when the power is 
turned "OFF".
• When the cutter blade is worn and dull, you can 
use it temporarily by enhancing the value of 
PRESSURE.
(Remember that this is just a temporary mea-
sure. To maintain satisfactory cutting quality, 
we recommend that you replace the cutter 
blade with a new one.)
When the tool conditions are proper, the results 
of test cutting are as follows:
• The two squares are cut perfectly.
• The base media remains uncut.
• No corner of the squares is rounded.
• No corner of the squares is curled-up.
Cut 
Condition
Cause Solution
Some parts 
uncut.
The blade is lifted 
above the media 
because of a too 
high cutting 
speed.
Lower the speed . 
(P.2-27)
Tighten up the knob for the 
tool holder. ( P.2-24)
The base 
media has 
been cut.
Too high 
pressure.
Lower the pressure. 
(P.2-27)
Too large 
protrusion of the 
cutter blade.
Adjust the protrusion of the 
cutter blade. ( P.2-24)
Any of the 
square 
corners 
rounded.
Improper 
OFFSET value.
Adjust the OFFSET value 
so that it suits the cutter 
blade in use. ( P.2-27)
Any of the 
square 
corners 
curled-up.
Too large 
protrusion of the 
cutter blade.
The cutting 
pressure is higher.
The 
[COMPENSATIO
N PRESSURE 
OFFSET value] is 
large.
More than two out 
of the above fall 
under this 
category.
Adjust the protrusion of the 
cutter blade. ( P.2-24)
Adjust the cutting pressure. 
(P.2-27)
Adjust the ADJ-PRS OFS 
value. ( P.4-15)





2-29
2
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Cutting Data
You can start cutting after completion of setting up a tool,
a media and the tool conditions.
Setting the Origin
The origin is a reference point for the cutting data.
Set the origin again before starting cutting.
1
Move  the  carriage  to  a  point  at  which  the
new origin is to be set.
•[]: Moves the carriage to the right.
[]: Moves the carriage to the left.
[]: Feeds the media to the rear of the machine.
[]: Feeds the media to the front of the machine.
2
Press the   key to register the 
origin.
• The tool condition is displayed.
Start Cutting
1
After  completion  of  setting  the  origin,
press   (REMOTE).
• The  screen  changes  to  REMOTE,  and  data can
be received from the PC.
2
Transmit data to be cut from the PC.
• While  cutting  the  received  data,  the  machine
displays the remaining amount of data.
Bringing the cutting to a halt
To temporarily stop the machine during cutting, press the
[FUNC3] (REMOTE) key once. Another press  of  the key
will make the machine resume cutting.
Stopping  a  Cutting  Operation  (Data
Clear)
If  you  want  to  stop  a  cutting  operation  of  the  received
data, clear the data.
1
In LOCAL mode, press the   key, 
Press 
 (DATA CLEAR)
.
2
Press the   key.
• The  reception  buffer is  cleared,  and  the  present
mode returns to LOCAL
Removing the Cutter Unit Temporar-
ily
When  cutting  or  printing-with-a-pen  job  is  finished,  the
cutter unit is on the platen.
To  check  the  result  of  cutting  (printing-with-a-pen)  or  to
set a new medium, follow the steps below to remove the
cutter unit from the platen temporarily.
1
Press the   key to display the "TEST
CUT" menu.
2
Press   (TEST CUT).
3
Press   to select the "CUTTER 
HEAD MOVE/RETRACT", and press the 
 key.
• The  cutter  unit  moves  from  on  the  platen  to  the
left end of the machine.
• When the coupling unit is connected to the printer
unit, switch the destination to the cutter unit, and
move to move it to the origin position. (Moving the
cutter unit)
• Change the origin before cutting the next data; 
otherwise, cutting will be performed over the previ-
ous data.
• In case the media has slipped off the machine 
during cutting operation, turn off the power imme-
diately; otherwise, the main unit may be damaged.
• You cannot use the functions that include opera-
tions while pausing. In this case, let the machine 
complete the cutting for the remaining portion of 
the data or discontinue the cutting by executing 
data clearing ( P.2-29).

New origin

• When clearing the data, the process will not restart 
even if you press the [FUNC3] (REMOTE) key.
• After clearing the data, switching to the remote 
mode and receiving another data, new data will be 
cut.
• Do not perform the data clearance during the data 
transmitting.
• Even after performing the data clearance, the 
received data is stored in the reception buffer.





2-30
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Cutting Media
By using the keys on the operation panel, you can cut the
media at any position.
1
In LOCAL mode, press  .
• It enters into the origin setting mode.
• By  pressing  [],  feed  the  media  to  the  cutting
position.
2
Press the   key.
• The media is cut.
• When the cutting has been completed, the current
mode returns to LOCAL.

X
0.0
Y
0.0
SET ORIGIN





This chapter
describes various settings of this machine.
About SETUP MENU ....................................3-2
SETUP MENU table .................................... 3-3
Register the Optimal Print Conditions to Match 
the Use ........................................................3-4
Setting of Media Correction ......................... 3-5
If the Positions of Dots Shift...  ..................... 3-6
Setting of Logical Seek  ............................... 3-7
Setting of Overprint  ..................................... 3-7
Setting of Drying Time ................................. 3-7
Setting of Left and Right Margins ................ 3-8
Setting of Vacuum Fan ................................ 3-8
Setting of Feed Speed  ................................ 3-8
Setting of MAPS .......................................... 3-9
Setting of Auto Cleaning  ............................. 3-9
Setting of Interval Wiping  .......................... 3-10
Setting of the UV Mode  ............................. 3-10
Setting Ionizer (option)  .............................. 3-10
Setting of LT mode .................................... 3-11
About MACHINE SETUP MENU  ................3-12
MACHINE SETUP MENUs table  .............. 3-13
Setting of AUTO Power-off ........................ 3-14
Setting of Take-up Unit  ............................. 3-14
Setting of the Display of Media Residual  .. 3-15
Setting of Media Detection .........................3-15
Setting of a LANGUAGE ............................3-16
Setting of Time ...........................................3-16
Setting of Unit (Temperature/ Length)  .......3-16
Setting of a KEY BUZZER .........................3-16
Setting of the CONFIRM. FEED  ................3-17
Setting of the SPACE FEED MODE ..........3-17
Setting of the Network  ...............................3-17
Setting of Event Mail Function ...................3-18
Initializing the Settings ...............................3-22
About NOZZLE CHECK MENU  ..................3-23
INFORMATION MENU table  .....................3-23
Printing Check Flow ...................................3-24
Printing Operations at "Nozzle Missing" 
Judgment and Error Occurrence  ...............3-24
Setting of the Printing Check  .....................3-25
Setting of the NOZZLE RECOVERY  .........3-25
Setting of the Judgment Condition .............3-25
About INFORMATION MENU  .....................3-26
INFORMATION MENU table  .....................3-27
Displaying the Information  .........................3-27
Displaying the machine's information 
(LOCAL guidance) .....................................3-28
Chapter 3
Setup





3-2
Chapter3 Setup
About SETUP MENU
On SETUP MENU, you can set the print conditions to match the media you usually use.
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
SETUP1 1/3
FEED COMP.
>
>
DROP.POScorrect
OFF
HOST
LOGICAL SEEK
OVER PRINT
>
DRYING TIME
>><<
MARGIN/LEFT
HOST
HOST
MARGIN/RIGHT
HOST
VACUUM FAN
100%
>
FEED SPEED
AUTO CLEANING
>><<
SETUP1 2/3
MENU
SETUP
>
>
MAINTENANCE
>
INFORMATION
>
NOZZLE CHECK
>
MACHINE SETUP
SETUP
●SETUP1
>
>
○SETUP2
>
○Temporary
>
○SETUP4
>
○SETUP3
Select SETUP 1 to 3 or Tempotary
and then press the    key
MAPS4
AUTO
UV MODE
OFF
LT mode
OFF
RESET SETTIG
>
SETUP1 3/3
INTERVAL WIPING
OFF
>><<

Press this to select SETUP
MENU,  or  to  switch  to  the
previous screen.
 SETUP MENUs at-a-glance
Press  this  to  switch  to  the
next screen.
Use  these  to  select  a
setting item.
Press  this  to  confirm  a
setting, etc.





3-3
3
2
2
2
Chapter3 Setup
SETUP MENU table
• For each setting item below, you can set it so that the machine may operate according to the value specified when you 
printed from your RIP software in the connected host PC.
• When you operate the machine according to the contents specified with the RIP software, set each item to "Host" when 
registering this machine type. When you set it other than "Host", the machine operates according to the machine setting.
• For the specifying method with the RIP software, refer to the operation manual of the RIP software.
Function name Set Value 
*1
*1. The underlined values above represent the default settings.
When no 
instruction 
from RIP 
exists  
*2
*2. This is the setting value to be used for printing when setting value is not specified at the RIP software (host) side, or, you give priority to the setting value at the
machine side.
Description
FEED COMP. ( P.3-5) -9999 to 0 to 9999                 
Used to print a pattern for correcting a media-
feeding rate and correct it.
DROP.POScorrect ( P.3-6) -40.0 to 0
 to 40.0                 
Used to adjust the dot position in go and return 
printing.
LOGICAL SEEK ( P.3-7) HOST
 /ON / OFF OFF Sets the scan movable area during printing.
OVER PRINT ( P.3-7) HOST
 / 1~9 times 1 time Set the number of times of overprinting of ink.
DRYING TIME
(P.3-7)
SCAN HOST/0.0 to 9.9 sec 0 sec Sets the time to wait for ink drying.
PRINT END HOST
/0 to 120 min 0 min Sets the ink drying time after printing.
MARGIN/LEFT ( P.3-8)
HOST
/-10 to 85 mm
0 mm
Sets a non-printing area along the right and left 
edges of the media.
MARGIN/RIGHT ( P.3-8 0 mm
VACUUM FAN ( P.3-8)
HOST
/ WEAK/ STANDARD/ 
STRONG
STRONG Sets the absorbability of the media.
FEED SPEED 
*3
(P.3-8)
*3. When you set this to "100%" or more, required time for completion of printing will be shortened. However, enough drying time cannot be ensured and it may
affect the image quality.
*4. Displayed when the optional ionizer is connected.
HOST/10 to 100 to 200%
100 % Changes the media feeding speed in printing.
AUTO
CLEANING
(P.3-9)
OFF, FILE,
LENGTH, TIME
                
Sets the automatic cleaning operation for the 
head performed before printing or during printing.
FILE
INTERVAL 1 to 1000                 
TYPE NORMAL/ SOFT/ HARD                 
LENGTH
INTERVAL 0.1 to 100.0 m                 
TYPE NORMAL/ SOFT/ HARD                 
TIME
INTERVAL 10 to 120 min                 
TYPE NORMAL/ SOFT/ HARD                 
Cleaning Check ON/ OFF                 
Sets whether to perform a nozzle check after 
automatic cleaning.
INTERVAL WIPING ( P.3-10) 3 to 255 min, OFF                 
Sets the wiping operation performed during 
printing.
MAPS
(P.3-9)
AUTO
Change the effect of "MAPS".
MANUAL
Smoothing 
level
0 to 100%
Speed
50 to 100%
Expansion
ON/ OFF
UV mode ( P.3-10) ON / OFF / No printing ON Specify UV irradiation during printing.
Ionizer
*4
 ( P.3-10) ON / OFF                  Set the operation of the ionizer (option).
LT mode ( P.3-11) ON / OFF OFF
Set LT mode when you need more flexibility than 
the default UV mode print.
RESET SETTING ( P.3-5) The configuration in the settings 1-4 can be reset individually.





3-4
Chapter3 Setup
Register the Optimal Print Conditions
to Match the Use
In  this  machine,  you  will  be  able  to  register  print
conditions, SETUP 1 to 4 individually to match the media
in advance.
For example, after print on different types of media, return
to  the  media  always  use.  In  such  case  you  can  set  the
optimum  printing  conditions  by  simply  selecting  the
registered SETUP 1 to 4.
Register the print conditions to SETUP 1 
to 4
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
  key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4,
and press the   key.
• The  item  selected  indicates  ●  and  others  show
○ .
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press   to  select each  item  in the
setup menu list.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
How to use [Temporary]
[Temporary]  is  not  only  to  set  the  print  condition  to  be
used only once, but also can be used for partial change of
the  registered  SETUP "1  to  4",  or for  reflecting  the  print
conditions set by the [Temporary] to SETUP 1 to 4.
 Register the print conditions in [Temporary]
Registration of the print conditions to [Temporary] can
be done as the same method as to SETUP 1 to 4.
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
  key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select "Temporary",
and press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press   to  select each  item  in the
setup menu list.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
 Copy the contents of SETUP 1 to 4 to 
[Temporary].
You  can  use  it  with  changing  the  part  of  registration
contents of SETUP 1 to 4.
Select  "RESET  SETTING"  then  "COPY"  from  the
registration  screen  of  [Temporary],  and  specify  the
copy source (SETUP 1 to 4).
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
 key in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select "Temporary",
and press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press  (<<).
4
Press   to select "RESET 
SETTING", and press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  "COPY",  and
press the   key.
• A screen appears, from which you can select the
source from which to copy settings.
6
Press   to  select the  copy source
(SETUP 1 to 4) and press the   key.
• A  confirmation  screen  appears  on  the  display,
asking for confirmation to copy the settings.
7
Press the   key.
• Settings  selected  in  Step  5  are  copied  to
Temporary.
8
Press    to  select  the  setting  item
to be changed, and press the   key.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.

Reflect the content set in [Temporary] to SETUP 1
to 4
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
 key in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select "Temporary",
and press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press   to  select  each item in  the
setup menu list.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
4
Display  the  last  page  of  Temporary  and
select  "SAVE  SETTING",  and  press  the
 key.
• A screen appears, from which you can select the
location to which to save settings.
• Print conditions that can be pre-registered with the 
machine are the four types, "SETUP 1" to "SETUP 
4".
• If you print with the print condition which do not 
often use, you will be able to set the print condi-
tions by selecting "Temporary".
If turn on the power again, settings in "Temporary" 
will return to the original state when it was pur-
chased.
Also if turn on the power again in "Temporary" 
state, it will be the state in selecting "SETUP 1".





3-5
3
2
2
2
Chapter3 Setup
5
Press   to select the location 
selected SETUP 1 to 4), and press the 
 key.
• A  confirmation  screen  appears  on  the  display,
asking for confirmation to save the settings.
6
Press the   key.
• Settings  of  Temporary  will  be  saved  to  the
location selected in step 5.
7
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Reset the registered contents
Reset the contents registered to SETUP 1 to 4.
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
  key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to  select SETUP 1  to  4 to
be reset and press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press  (<<).
4
Press   to select "RESET 
SETTING", and press the   key.
• After  the  check  screen  for  SETUP  RESET  is
displayed, press the [ENTER] key to execute.
5
Press the   key to execute
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Media Correction
Correct  the  media  feed  amount  to  match  the  type  of
media you are using.
If  the  correction  value  is  not  appropriate,  stripes  may
appear  on  the  printed  image,  thus  resulting  in  a  poor
printing.
A  pattern  for  media  correction  is  printed  and  a  media-
feeding rate is corrected.
1
Set a media on the machine. ( P.2-4)
2
Press  the 
  (MENU)
 key in
LOCAL.
3
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4,
and press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  "FEED  COMP",
and press the   key.
5
Press  the    key  once  to  print  a
correction pattern.
6
Check  the  correction  pattern  and  enter  a
correction value.
• A screen for entering the correction value will be
displayed.
• Enter a correction value in "+":
The boundary between the two bands is widened.
• Enter a correction value in "-":
The  boundary  between  the  two  bands  is
narrowed.
• When  you  change  the  correction  value  by  "30",
the width of  the boundary changes by  about 0.1
mm.
7
Press the   key.
• Print a correction pattern again and check it.
• When  media  correction  is  needed,  perform  the
operation in Step 6 to make correction.
• On completion of [MEDIA COMP.] during use of a 
roll media, the media returns to the printing origin. 
Then the roll media in the rear of this machine will 
slacken.
Before printing, take up the slack in the roll media 
by hand; a loose roll media can result in an inferior 
image quality.
• When printing with a take-up device, set the media 
first and perform media correction.
• Two bands are printed in the correction pattern.
• Make adjustment so that an even color density is 
obtained in the boundary between the two bands.

Second band
First band
Media feed direction





3-6
Chapter3 Setup
8
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Correcting media-feeding during 
printing
A media-feeding rate can be corrected even in the remote
mode or when image data is printed.
1
Press the 
 (ADJUST)
 key in
remote mode.
2
Press  ,  and  then  enter  a  media-
feeding rate.
• Corrected feeding rate: -9999 to 9999
• The  value  entered  here  is  reflected  in  the
corrected feeding rate soon.
3
Press the   key twice.
• The changed value is registered.
If the Positions of Dots Shift...
When the condition for printing (media thickness/ink type/
etc.) has been  changed,  perform the  following  operation
to  correct  the  ink  drop  position  for  bidirectional  (Bi)
printing and obtain the proper printing result.
Example of a printed pattern
1
Set a media on the machine. ( P.2-4)
• In order  to print  a  pattern,  media  that is  at least
500 mm wide is necessary.
2
Press  the 
  (MENU)
 key in
LOCAL.
3
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
4
Press   to select 
"DROP.POScorrect", and press the 
 key.
5
Press the   key.
• Printing  of  the  Drop  position  correct  printed
pattern will start.
• Multiple  test  patterns  are  printed.  (The  printed
patterns  are  called  Pattern  1,  Pattern  2,  Pattern
3... in the order of printing.)
6
Press   to enter a correction value
of Pattern 1, and press the   key.
• Corrected feeding rate: -40 to 40
• Check  the  test  patterns.  The  position  where  an
outward  feeding  line  and  a  return  feeding  line
become one straight line is the correction value.
• When the correction value in not between -40 and
40,  adjust  the  height  of  the  printing  heads  and
perform the operations in Step 2 and later.
7
In  the  same  way  as  in  Step  4,  enter  a
correction value of Pattern 2 and later, and
press the   key.
8
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.

The dots at the fourth position 
counted from the zero position in 
the positive direction form a 
straight line.
Output 





3-7
3
2
2
2
Chapter3 Setup
Setting of Logical Seek
The head's operation varies depending on the LOGICAL
SEEK settings, as shown in the figure below.
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
  key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press   to select "LOGICAL 
SEEK", and press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  a  set  value, and
press the   key.
• Set value: HOST/ON/OFF
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Overprint
Sets the number of layers in which ink is to be applied.
1
Press  the 
 (MENU)
    key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4,
and press the   key.
• Setup menu appears.
3
Press   to  select  "Overprint", and
press the   key.
4
Press   to set number of 
Overprint, and press the   key.
• Setting value : Host/ 1 to 9 times
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Drying Time
In the drying time setting, the following items for ink drying
time are set.
• SCAN: Ink drying time for each scanning is set. (During 
bidirectional printing, the machine stops for a 
certain period of time specified for each of the 
outward and return scanning.)
• PRINT END: Ink drying time for after printing is set.
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
 key in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press    to  select "DRYING  TIME",
and press the   key.
4
Press    to  set  drying
time, and press the   key.
• Set the drying time for scanning and after printing
is completed. 
• Scanning setting value: Host or 0.0 to 9.9 sec.
• Print end setting value: Host or 0 to 120 min.
• Item selecting: by the [][] keys
• Time setting: by the [][] keys
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.

UNI-DIRECTIONAL BI-DIRECTIONAL
Movement of heads when LOGICAL seek is OFF
Movement of heads when LOGICAL seek is ON
UNI-DIRECTIONAL BI-DIRECTIONAL
Media
Red arrow:
Movement of head
Print area
Red arrow:
Movement of head
Print area
Media
Media Media





3-8
Chapter3 Setup
Setting of Left and Right Margins
Set a  non-printing  area along  the left and  right edges of
the media.
The offset value against the standard margin 15 mm is set
hereupon.
1
Press  the 
 (MENU)
    key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press 
 (>>)
.
4
Press    to  select  "Margin/L"  or
"Margin/R", and press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  a  set  value, and
press the   key.
• Set value: HOST/-10 to 85 mm
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Vacuum Fan
Sets the absorbability of the media.
By setting the absorption power to match the media, you
can prevent print errors due to media rise-up.
1
Press  the 
 (MENU)
    key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4,
and press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press 
 (>>)
.
4
Press   to  select "VACUUM FAN",
and press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  a  set  value, and
press the   key.
• Set value: HOST/WEAK/STANDARD/STRONG
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Feed Speed
Changes the media feeding speed in printing.
1
Press  the 
  (MENU)
 key in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press 
 (>>)
.
4
Press    to  select  "FEED  SPEED",
and press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  a  set  value, and
press the   key.
• Set value: HOST/10% to 200%
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
• When you give priority to the setting at the RIP 
software side, make the setting value "Host".
• You cannot specify the margins at the attached 
RIP software (RasterLink). When you use the Ras-
terLink, if you set this machine to "Host", printing 
will be performed in "Margins for right and left off 
set value= 0 mm" status.
• The margin setting is reflected when the media 
width is detected.
• Pay attention to that printing may start on the 
media press if a right and left margin is set to 5 
mm or less when the media press is used in print-
ing.
• Depending on the print conditions, some settings 
might not be applied (that is, the feeding speed 
might remain the same).





3-9
3
2
2
2
Chapter3 Setup
Setting of MAPS
The  MAPS  (Mimaki  Advanced  PassSystem)  function
disperses the pass boundary to make the feeding stripes
less visible.
With this function, the degree of application of MAPS can
be changed.
Setting the MAPS function
1
Press  the    (MENU)    keys
in LOCAL
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key
• Setup menu is displayed.
3
Press   (<<) 
4
Press    to  select  "MAPS4",  and
then press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  a  set  value, and
press the   key.
• Set value: AUTO/MANUAL
• If you select “MANUAL,” proceed to Step 6, and if
you select another, proceed to Step 8.
6
Press    to  select  "Smoothing
Level", and then press the   key
7
Press   to change the set value for
"Smoothing  Level",  and  then  press  the
key
Smoothing
• Set Value: 0 to 100% (set in units of 5%)
• The MAPS4 effect increases as you increase the
set  value.  The  MAPS4  effect  decreases  as  you
decrease the set value.
• When using white ink, make setting for Smoothing
Level for both color ink and white ink.
Speed
• Setting value: 50 to 100% (set in units of 10%)
• Decreasing  the  speed  increases  the  effect  of
MAPS 4, making stripes less noticeable.
But, printing speed will be reduced.
Expansion
• Setting value: ON / OFF
• Setting  the  expansion  to  "ON"  may  reduce  light
fringes.
But, the graininess may increase.
8
Press the   key several times to
end the setting
Setting of Auto Cleaning
You can set the machine so that it counts the number of 
printed files or the length or time after printing has been 
completed, and performs cleaning automatically if 
required.
You  can select  the auto  cleaning  setting  from four  types
below:
• PAGE:  Set the cleaning intervals by the number of 
printed files.
• LENGTH: Set the cleaning intervals by the printed 
length.
• TIME:  Set the cleaning intervals by the printed 
time.
• OFF:  Select this value to disable AUTO CLEANING
Automatic  nozzle  check  after  auto  cleaning  can  be  set.
(Cleaning Check function)
The machine can perform a stable printing operation with
its heads always kept clean.
1
Press  the 
 (MENU)
    key  in
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
3
Press 
(>>)
.
4
Press   to select "AUTO 
CLEANING", and press the   key.
5
Press the   key and press 
to select the type of auto cleaning.
• There are “FILE”, “LENGTH”, “TIME”, and "OFF"
for auto cleaning types.
• FILE:  When  the  set  number  of  prints  has  been
completed, the machine performs head cleaning
automatically.
• LENGTH:  When  the  set  length  has  passed,  the
machine performs head cleaning automatically.
• TIME:  When  the  set  time  has  passed,  the
machine performs head cleaning automatically.
• OFF:  If  you  do  not  want  to  set  auto  cleaning,
select "OFF" and proceed to the Step 7.
6
Press the   key, and then use 
 to set cleaning intervals.
• Depending on  the auto cleaning type selected in
the Step 3, the setting value differs.
• For FILE: 1 to 1000 files
• For LENGTH: 0.1 to 100.0 m (in 0.1 m increment)
• For TIME: 10 to 120 min (in 10 min increment)
7
Press the   key, and then use 
 to select a cleaning type.
• Set Value: NORMAL/SOFT/HARD
8
Press the   key, and then use 
 to select "Cleaning Check".
9
Press the   key, and then use 
 to select a setting.
• Set Value: ON/ OFF
• MAPS provides two setting options: "AUTO" and 
"MANUAL". MAPS applies the one most suitable 
for your printing conditions, so please normally 
use "AUTO" (default value).
• Changing the MAPS settings may change the 
color tone. Check the effects before use.
• MAPS may not be effective depending on image to 
be printed. Use it after checking effect in advance.





3-10
Chapter3 Setup
10
Press the   key.
11
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Interval Wiping
When the set time has passed, nozzle face of the head is
cleaned  automatically  to  remove  ink  droplets  on  the
nozzle face.
In case that deflection, nozzle missing, or symptom which
ink droplets fall  down occurred,  set  the  interval  between
each operation shorter.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
  key in 
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select "Setting" and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
4
Press 
 (<<)
.
5
Press   to select "INTERVAL 
WIPING", and press the   key.
6
Press   to set intervals.
• Set Value: 3 to 255 minutes, OFF
• When  [OFF]  is  set,  periodical  wiping  is  not
executed.
7
Press the   key.
8
Press the   key several times to 
end the setting.
Setting of the UV Mode
You  can  select  the  mode for  the  LED  UV  device  from 3
types.
By  setting  the  UV  mode,  you  can  turn  off  LED  UV  light
when, for example, you are using media that is sensitive
to  heat  or  you  are  going  to  perform  test  cutting  while
cleaning.
1
In LOCAL mode, press the 
 (MENU)
 
key.
2
Press   to select "Setting" and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select  SETUP 1 to 4, 
and then press the   key.
• The setup menu appears.
4
Press   to select "UV Mode", and 
then press the   key.
5
Press   to select a mode, and then 
press the   key.
• Available settings: ON/OFF/No printing
6
When you are finished setting the UV 
mode, press the   key several 
times.
Setting Ionizer (option)
Connect  the  ionizer  and  set  it  on  when  removing  static
electricity. 
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
 key in local.
2
Press    to  select  "Setting"  and
press the   key.
• The setting menu is displayed.
3
Press    to  select  "Ionizer"  and
press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  the  setting
value, then press the   key.
• Setting value: ON / OFF
• Depending on the state of the heads, etc., the 
image quality deterioration may not be improved 
even with this function performed. In this case, 
contact our service office or the distributor in your 
region.
ON Turns on LED UV light.
OFF Turns off LED UV light while printing.
No 
printing
Turns on LED UV light without performing printing. 
This mode is useful when, for example, you did 
not turn on LED UV light during printing but later 
on decide to cure the ink. (This mode is usually 
not set.)
• For safety, please refer to "UCJV Series Ionizer 
Operation Manual".
• Displayed when the ionizer is connected.





3-11
3
2
2
2
Chapter3 Setup
5
Press  the    key  several  times
to end.
Setting of LT mode
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
  key in 
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select "Setting" and 
press the   key.
3
Press 
 (>>)
.
4
Press   to select "LT mode", and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select set  value, and 
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON / OFF
6
Press the   key several times 
to end.
• Since UV light intensity adjustment is performed, 
check the print performance (stickiness, odor etc.) 
before using the LT mode.
• Effective condition

Ink type Ink set Resolution Pass Media
LUS170
4C
300×900 6 pass
PVC
Tarp a u l i n
600×600 8 pass
PVC
Tarp a u l i n
6C
300×900 12 pass
PVC
Tarp a u l i n
600×600 16 pass
PVC
Tarp a u l i n





3-12
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
About MACHINE SETUP MENU
The MACHINE SETUP MENU provides the various settings that allow you to use this machine comfortably.
The following items can be set in Machine settings.

MACHINE SETUP
AUTO POWER OFF
30min
TAKE-UP UNIT
>
OFF
MEDIA REMAIN
>><<
MACHINE SETUP
TIME
>
℃
UNIT/TEMP.
mm
UNIT/LENGTH
MEDIA DETECT
>
LANGAGE
>
>><<
Two
times
MACHINE SETUP
KEY BUZZER
EVENT MAIL
ON
CONFIRM. FEED
ON
SPACE FEED MODE
>
NETWORK
>
>
>><<
RESET
>
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
MENU
SETUP
>
>
MAINTENANCE
>
MACHINE SETUP
NOZZLE CHECK
>
>
INFORMATION
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL

Press  this  to  confirm  a
setting, etc.
 MACHINE SETUP MENUs at-a-glance
Press this to select 
MACHINE SETUP MENU, 
or to switch to the previous 
screen.
Press this to switch to the
next screen.
Use  these  to  select  a
setting item.





3-13
3
2
2
2
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
MACHINE SETUP MENUs table
Function name Set value Default Meaning
AUTO Power-off ( P.3-14) NONE/10 to 600 min 30min
When no operation has been performed for the set 
time, the power supply is automatically turned "OFF".
TAKE-UP UNIT 
(P.3-14)
TAKE-UP UNIT ON/ OFF ON
For setting whether the take-up unit is used or not 
used.
TAKE-UP SW Continuance/ Temporary
Continua
nce
Set the operation method when press the ON / OFF 
button on the take-up unit.
MEDIA REMAIN ( P.3-15) ON/ OFF OFF You can control the remaining amount of media.
MEDIA DETECT 
(P.3-15)
DETECTION 
TYPE
AUTO/MANUAL AUTO Set the media detection method.
USE PR 
NUMBER 
QUERY
ON / OFF ON
Set whether or not to enter the number of the pinch 
rollers you are using during media detection.
LANGUAGE( P.3-16)
English /Japanese/Chinese/
Turkish
English Displayed language is changed.
TIME ( P.3-16) +4 h to -20 h
Japan 
time
Time difference is corrected.
UNIT/ TEMP. ( P.3-16) C (Celsius)/F (Fahrenheit) C A unit for displaying temperature is set.
UNIT/ LENGTH ( P.3-16) mm / inch mm A unit for displaying length and area is set.
KEY BUZZER ( P.3-16) ON / OFF ON A buzzer sound when keys are pressed is set.
CONFIRM. FEED ( P.3-17) ON / OFF ON
Set whether media feeding is performed for 
checking the result of the test printing etc. or not.
SPACE FEED MODE ( P.3-17)
INTERMITTENT /
CONTINUOUS
INTERMI
TTENT
Change the feed mode of the margin included in the 
image data.
NETWORK
(P.3-17)
Set the network.
Check IP Addr. The IP address currently used by this machine is displayed.
Check MAC 
Addr.
The IP address currently used by this machine is displayed.
DHCP ON/ OFF
When it is ON, the IP address given by the DHCP 
server is used.
AutoIP ON/ OFF
When it is ON, the IP address is determined by the 
AutoIP protocol. However, DHCP is ON, DHCP has 
priority.
IP Address
*1
Set the IP address used by this machine.
Default
Gateway 
*1
Set the default gateway used by this machine.
DNS 
Address 
*1
Set the DNS server address used by this machine.
SubNet
Mask 
*1
Set the digit number of the subnet mask used by this machine.
EVENT MAIL
Mail Delivery
(P.3-18)
ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail when 
the set event occurs.
Select
Event
(P.3-18)
Print Start 
Event
ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail at the 
start of printing.
Print End 
Event
ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail at the 
end of printing.
Plot Start 
Event
ON / OFF OFF
Select whether an e-mail is sent or not when cutting 
starts.
Plot End 
Event
ON / OFF OFF
Select whether an e-mail is sent or not when cutting 
ends.
Error Event ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/do not send the e-mail when 
an error occurs.
Warning 
Event
ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/do not send the e-mail when 
a warning occurs.
Other Event ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail when 
an event other than the above occurs.
Mail Address
(P.3-19)
Set the e-mail address to 
which you send the event 
mail.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols (within 96 characters)





3-14
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
Setting of AUTO Power-off
When  no  operation  has  been  performed  for  the  set
time, the power supply is automatically turned "OFF".
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press    to  select  "AUTO  POWER
OFF", and press the   key.
3
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: none, 10 to 600 min
4
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Take-up Unit
Set  the  operation  method  when  press  the  ON  /  OFF
button on the take-up unit.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press   to select "TAKE-UP UNIT",
and press the   key.
3
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/ OFF
4
Press   to select 
"TAKE-UP SW",
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select a setting,
and press the   key.
• Set Value: Continuance/ Temporary
Continuance:Switching ON / OFF the winding 
operation when pressing the switch 
each time. (Take-up unit in 
operation does not stop until press 
again ON / OFF switch.)
Temporary: Do the winding operation only while 
holding down the switch. (When 
release the switch, winding 
operation is stopped. )
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
EVENT MAIL
Message 
Subject
(P.3-19)
Set the characters to write in 
the subject of the event mail.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols (within 8 characters)
Server Setup
(P.3-19)
SMTP Address Set the SMTP server.
SMTP Port No. Set an SMTP port number.
SENDER ADDRESS Set the e-mail address to be used as the sender mail address.
Authentication
OFF
Set the SMTP server authentication method (SMTP 
authentication).
POP before 
SMTP
SMTP 
Authentication
User Name 
*2
Set the user name used for the authentication.
Password 
*2
Set the password used for the authentication.
POP3 Address 
*3
Set the POP server.
APOP 
*3
Set ON/ OFF of APOP.
Transmit Test
(P.3-21)
Send the test e-mail.
RESET ( P.3-22)                                   All setting values are returned to the status default.
*1.  Settable when both of DHCP and AutoIP are [OFF]
*2. Settable only when Auth. is not OFF
*3. Settable only when Auth. is POP before SMTP
Function name Set value Default Meaning





3-15
3
2
2
2
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
 
Setting of the Display of Media Resid-
ual
Whether  the  screen  displays  the  remaining  amount  of  a
media is set.
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press   to select "MEDIA 
REMAIN", and press the   key.
3
Press    to  select  a  set  value,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/OFF
4
Press the   key.
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
 
Setting of Media Detection
Set the following two items in media detection settings.
1
Press 
 (MENU)  (twice
) 
.
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press   to select "MEDIA 
DETECT", and press the   key.
3
Press   to select AUTO/MANUAL.
4
Press the   key.
5
Press   to select "USE PR 
NUMBER QUERY", and press the   
key.
6
Press   to select ON/OFF.
7
Press the   key.
8
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
When the media 
remaining amount 
display is turned to 
"ON"
The remaining amount of the media is 
displayed during REMOTE mode.
(If you are using leaf media, the printed 
length is displayed instead.)
When the media 
remaining amount 
display is turned to 
"OFF"
The remaining amount of a media is not 
displayed during REMOTE mode.
• The amount of a media that has been fed by the 
printing and jog keys is reflected in the remaining 
amount of a media.
• The length of the media (initial value of the remain-
ing amount) is entered when roll media is 
detected. ( P.2-13)
• The setting configured here does not become 
effective unless media detection is performed after 
the setting has been complete.
Setting of Media 
Detection
When loading the media, set whether 
to detect the media width automatically 
(AUTO) or decide the print (or cut) 
range manually (MANUAL).
USE PR NUMBER 
QUERY
Set whether or not to enter the number 
of the pinch rollers you are using during 
media detection.
• When using the media that cannot be detected by 
the sensor, such as black cutting sheets, set the 
media detection setting to "MANUAL".
When using the attached RIP software 
(RasterLink)
• If you set the input of the number of pinch rollers 
"OFF" in Step 8, the pinch roller pressure and the 
number of use, that has been set in RasterLink, 
may not match in some cases.
Set to "OFF" only when performing set of pinch 
roller pressure ( P.2-13) in this machine.





3-16
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
Setting of a LANGUAGE
You can change the displayed language.
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press    to  select  "LANGUAGE",
and press the   key.
3
Press    to  select  a  language,  and
press the   key.
4
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Time
You can set time of your country (time difference).
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>)
.
3
Press   to select "TIME", and press
the   key.
4
Press   to enter time, and
press the   key.
• Year/Month/Day/Time  selecting:  by  the  [][]
keys
• Year/Month/Day/Time  inputting:  by  the  [][]
keys
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Unit (Temperature/ Length)
Units used by this machine are set.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
)  .
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>)
.
3
Press    to  select  "UNIT/TEMP."  or
"UNIT/LENGTH",  and  press  the 
key.
4
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Temperature setting: °C/°F
• Length setting: mm/inch
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of a KEY BUZZER
You can turn off the buzzer sound when pressing the key.
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
(twice
)  .
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
once.
3
Press   to select "KEEP BUZZER",
and press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/ OFF
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
• -20 hours to +4 hours can be set.
• Some of the length information displayed for cut-
ting-related functions is always shown in units of 
mm, regardless of the setting you specify here.
• When the key buzzer is set to "OFF", the buzzer 
sound for errors, warnings, operation completion, 
etc. cannot be shut off.





3-17
3
2
2
2
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
Setting of the CONFIRM. FEED
Set whether media feeding is performed for checking the
result of the test printing etc. or not.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
)  .
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
once.
3
Press    to  select  "CONFIRM.
FEED", and press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/ OFF
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of the SPACE FEED MODE
Change  the  feed  mode  of  the  margin  included  in  the
image  data  (the  space of  no  data  to  be  printed).  If  print
data with much margin, set to “CONTINUOUS”, then the
print time can be shorten.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "SPACE  FEED
MODE", and press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  a  setting,  Press
the   key.
INTERMITTENT: Perform intermittent feed 
operation of the path division 
unit
CONTINUOUS: Feed the no data part at a time
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of the Network
You  can  also  perform  network  setting  with  "Network
Configurator",  the  tool  to  perform  network  setting  of
Mimaki's product. To download the Network Configurator,
check "  Driver /  Utility" on  the download  page at Mimaki
Engineering (https://mimaki.com/download).
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press   to select "NETWORK", and
press the   key.
4
Press   to  select "CHECK IP 
ADDRESS", and press the   key.
• The IP  address currently used with this machine
is displayed.
• When  you  have  finished  the  check,  press  the
[ENTER] key.
5
Press    to  select  "CHECK  MAC
ADDRESS", and press the   key.
• The  MAC  address  currently  used  with  this
machine is displayed.
• When  you  have  finished  the  check,  press  the
[ENTER] key.
6
Press    to  select  "DHCP",  and
press the   key.
7
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/ OFF
• When it is ON, the IP address given by the DHCP
server is used.
8
Press    to  select  "AutoIP",  and
press the   key.
9
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/ OFF
• When  it  is  ON,  the  IP  address is  determined by
the  AutoIP  protocol.  However,  DHCP  is  ON,
DHCP has priority.
10
Press    to  select  "IP  ADDRESS",
and press the   key.
• Both of DHCP and AutoIP is OFF, you can set IP
Address.  For  other  than  above,  proceed  to  the
Step 14.
• After connecting with the network, it takes time 
until the IP address is determined. If the IP 
address has not been determined, "0.0.0.0" is 
displayed.





3-18
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
11
Press    to  enter  the  IP  address,
and press the   key.
12
Press the   key.
• The  setting  items  DEFAULT  GATEWAY,  DNS
ADDRESS and SUBNET MASK will be displayed.
• Both  of  DHCP  and  AutoIP  is  OFF,  you  can  set
DEFAULT GATEWAY/ DNS ADDRESS/ SUBNET
MASK. For other than above, proceed to the Step
14.
13
Press   several times to select a setting
item, and press the   key.
14
Press   to select a setting,
and press the   key.
15
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting of Event Mail Function
Set the function to send e-mails to the set e-mail address
when events such as cutting start/ end and stop due to an
error.
You  can  also  perform  network  setting  with  "Network
Configurator",  the  tool  to  perform  network  setting  of
Mimaki's product. To download the Network Configurator,
check  "Driver  /  Utility"  on  the  download  page  at  Mimaki
Engineering (https://mimaki.com/download).
Enable the event mail function
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "EVENT  MAIL",
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select "MAIL 
DELIVERY", and press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  "ON",  and  press
the   key.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Set the event to send an event mail
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "EVENT  MAIL",
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select "SELECT 
EVENT", and press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  an  event,  and
press    again  to  select  ON/OFF.
press the   key.
• Set Value: ON/OFF
• When the event set to ON occurs, e-mail is sent.
• When  the  [ENTER]  key  is  pressed,  the  SETUP
screen for the next event is displayed.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
• To reflect network setting, once turn off the power 
supply and turn it on again.
Disclaimer
• The customer is responsible for the communication fee for 
Internet communication such as e-mail notification.
• The notification by the event mail function may not be deliv-
ered due to Internet environment, failure of the  machine/ the 
power supply, etc. Mimaki has absolutely no responsibility for 
any damages or loss resulting from non-delivery or delays.
• You can use event mail function by connecting 
LAN to this machine. Please prepare for LAN 
cable connection beforehand.
• Not compatible with SSL communication.
Event name Description
PRINT START
Sets sending/not sending of an e-mail 
when printing starts.
PRINT END
Sets sending/not sending of an e-mail 
when printing ends.
ERROR
Sets sending/not sending of an e-mail 
when printing is stopped due to 
occurrence of an error.
PLOT START
Select whether an e-mail is sent or not 
when cutting starts
PLOT END
Select whether an e-mail is sent or not 
when cutting ends
WARNING
Sets sending/not sending of an e-mail 
when a warning occurs during printing.
etc.
Sets sending/not sending of an e-mail 
when an event other than the above 
occurs.





3-19
3
2
2
2
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
Set the e-mail address
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "EVENT  MAIL",
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select "MAIL 
ADDRESS", and press the   key.
5
Press    to  set  a  mail
address, and press the   key.
• Set  the  e-mail  address  to  which  you  send  the
event mail.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 96 characters.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Set the subject
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "EVENT  MAIL",
and press the   key.
4
Press    to  select  "MESSAGE
SUBJECT", and press the   key.
5
Press    to  set  a  subject,
and press the   key.
• Set  the  characters  to  write  in  the  subject  of  the
event mail.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 8 characters.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Set the server
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "EVENT  MAIL",
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select "SERVER 
SETUP", and press the   key.
5
Press   to select "SMTP 
ADDRESS", and press the   key.
6
Press    to  set  an  SMTP
address and press the   key.
•Press [][][][] to set an SMTP address.
• Input the SMTP address name.
7
Press   to select "SMTP PORT 
No.", and press the   key.
8
Press    to  set  an  SMTP  port
number, and press the   key.
• Set an SMTP port number.
9
Press    to  select  a  sender  mail
address, and press the   key.
10
Press    to  set  a  sender
mail address, and press the   key.
•Press [][][][]  to set  the  e-mail address  to
be used as the sender mail address.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 64 characters.
11
Press   to select 
"AUTHENTICATION", and press the 
 key.
12
Press    to  set  an  authentication
method, and press the   key.
• Set  the  authentication  method  of  the  SMTP
server.
• When you select [OFF], proceed to the Step 20.
13
Press    to  select  "USER  NAME",
and press the   key.
• Depending on your server, if you do not 
set the e-mail address not supporting the 
account, sending/ receiving e-mails may 
be unavailable.





3-20
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
14
Press    to  set  a  user
name, and press the   key.
•Press [][][][]  to  set  the  user  name  to  be
used for authentication.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 30 characters.
15
Press    to  select  "PASSWORD",
and press the   key.
16
Press    to  set  a
password, and press the   key.
•Press [][][][]  to  set  the  password  to  be
used for authentication.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 15 characters.
• When you select [POP before SMTP] in the Step
11, set the items in the Step 16 to 19.
17
Press   to select "POP3 
ADDRESS", and press the   key.
18
Press   to set a POP3 
address, and press the   key.
•Press [][][][] to set a POP server.
• Input the POP server name.
19
Press    to  select  "APOP",  and
press the   key.
20
Press    to  set  ON/OFF,  and  press
the   key.
21
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
• On the password setting screen, you can 
only check the value that you are currently 
inputting.





3-21
1
2
3
4
5
6
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
Send a test e-mail
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press 
 (>>) 
twice.
3
Press    to  select  "EVENT  MAIL",
and press the   key.
4
Press 
 (>>) 
.
• "TRANSMIT TEST" will be selected.
5
Press the   key.
• The transmission result is displayed.
• If the transmission of a test e-mail ends in failure,
an error code is displayed.
Refer to the next page to solve the problem.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.

Transmi t Test
Fa i l ed : 12345
Error code

• The sent result of the test e-mail is the result of e-mail sending process performed by this machine to the e-mail server.
It does not indicate that the e-mail was received at the address.
• If the spam e-mail filter etc. has been set in the terminal in which e-mails are received, even if "Sending has been com-
pleted" is displayed, the e-mail cannot be received in some cases.
• If sending test e-mail has failed, the error code below is displayed.
• If the error cannot be solved, try again after a while.
• For the server setting etc., contact with the network administrator or the provider.

Error code Possible cause Remedy
10
Network connection error
• Check that the machine is connected to the network.
•  Check that the machine IP address is correct.
•  Check that the machine is in the environment where DNS is 
available.
20
No valid e-mail address.
• Enter the correct e-mail address.
11003
11004
The POP server cannot be found.
Or cannot access DNS server.
• Check the POP server address.
• Check that the machine is in the environment where DNS is 
available.
11021
Cannot connect with the POP server.
• Check the POP server setting.
• Check the firewall setting.
12010
An error returns from the POP server.
• Check the POP server setting.
13000
The POP authentication has failed.
• Check the user name and the password.
•  Check the APOP setting.
• Confirm the authentication method.
10013
10014
The SMTP server cannot be found.
Or cannot access DNS server.
• Check the SMTP server address.
• Check that the machine is in the environment where DNS is 
available.
10021
Cannot connect with the SMTP server.
• Check the SMTP server setting.
• Check the SMTP port number.
• Check the firewall setting.
10
11
20
21
An error returns from the SMTP 
server.
Or, there was no response.
• Check the SMTP server setting.
• Cannot communicate with a server that requires mandatory 
SSL communication.
• Check protocol filter settings.
12
It is invalid sender address.
• Check that the e-mail address supporting the account entered 
in the user name/ the password is set in SENDER 
ADDRESS.
13
The e-mail address cannot be found.
Or, it is invalid sender address.
• Check the e-mail address.
• Even if there is a mistake in the e-mail address, this error can-
not be detected in some cases.
• Check that the e-mail address supporting the account entered 
in the user name/ the password is set in SENDER 
ADDRESS.
22000
22008
SMTP authentication error
• Confirm the authentication method.
23
24
25
The SMTP authentication has failed.
• Check the user name and the password.
"" is the error code returned from the e-mail server.





3-22
Chapter 3 Machine Setting
Initializing the Settings
You can return the setting of "SETUP", "MAINTENANCE"
and "MACHINE SETUP" to the original status.
1
In  LOCAL  mode,  press 
 (MENU)
(twice
).
• The MACHINE SETUP MENU appears.
2
Press
 (<<)
.
3
Press    to  select  "RESET",  and
press the   key.
4
Press the   key.
• The already configured settings are initialized.
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.





Chapter 3 NOZZLE CHECK
3-23
1
2
3
4
5
6
About NOZZLE CHECK MENU
Set operations concerning the nozzle missing detection function.
INFORMATION MENU table
Function name Set value Default Description
Printing Check
(P.3-25)
ON/OFF OFF
Set this when you want to conduct nozzle check at the 
beginning of online printing.
(ON)
Check 
Interval
LENGTH 0.1 to 50.0 m 30.0m Conducts nozzle check at each set length.
FILE 1 to 100 30 files Conducts nozzle check at each set number of files. 
*1
*1. When the set length is reached during printing, nozzle check is conducted at the start of the next printing.
Action
CLEANING
OFF/ SOFT/ 
NORMAL/ HARD
SOFT Sets the type of cleaning performed during recovery work.
RETRY 
COUNT
0 to 3 0 Repeats the retry operation for the set number of times.
NOZZLE RECOVERY ( P.3-
25)
ON/OFF OFF Set this when you want to conduct automatic nozzle recovery.
Judgment Condition ( P.3-25) 1 to 64 1
Sets how many missing nozzles are detected for "Nozzle 
Missing" judgment to be made according to each color. 
(Maximum 16 per 1 nozzle line) 
*2
*2. Depending on the print conditions, nozzle recovery is not applied in some cases.
three
times
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
NOZZLE CHECK
Printing Check
OFF
OFF
NOZZLE RECOVERY
>
Judgement Condition
MENU
SETUP
>
>
MAINTENANCE
>
MACHINE SETTUP
NOZZLE CHECK
>
>
INFORMATION
>><<
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
Press  this  to  confirm  a
setting, etc.
 NCU MENUs at-a-glance
Press this to select 
INFORMATION MENU, or to 
switch to the previous screen.
Press this to switch to the
next screen.
Use  these  to  select  a
setting item.





Chapter 3 NOZZLE CHECK
3-24
Printing Check Flow
Nozzle check is conducted according to the following flow at the start of printing.
Printing Operations at "Nozzle Missing" Judgment and Error Occurrence
 When judged to be "Nozzle Missing" Printing is stopped.
 When error occurs during nozzle check Printing is stopped and "Printing Check" is automatically 
turned OFF. After recovering from the error, set "Printing 
Check" once again.
• Turn the "Printing Check" setting ON to be enabled.
• Only perform RETRY COUNT and Printing Check settings when the settings are enabled.
1
Nozzle check  Judgment
2
3
Recovery operation  
Nozzle check  Judgment
4
Retry  Judgment
Printing Check  Judgment
Detects missing nozzles.
If more missing nozzles than "Judgment 
Condition" are detected after the nozzle check, 
cleaning is performed and nozzle check is 
conducted again.
5
Nozzle missing judgment
If more missing nozzles than "Judgment 
Condition" are eventually detected, continued 
printing will be deemed impossible and printing 
will stop.
If more missing nozzles than "Judgment Condition"
are  detected  after  the  recovery  operation,  the
recovery operation is conducted again.
• If the "RETRY COUNT" setting is configured to 1 or more, 
this becomes effective.
Nozzle recovery is automatically conducted 
following nozzle check and recovery operation.
• Turn the "Printing Check" setting ON to be enabled.





3-25
1
2
3
4
5
6
Chapter 3 NOZZLE CHECK
Setting of the Printing Check
Select ON when you want to conduct nozzle check at the
start of online printing.
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
 (three times) 
.
• The NOZZLE CHECK MENU appears.
2
Select  "Printing  Check",  and  then  press
the  key.
3
Press   to select ON, and press the
 key.
• The  "Check  Interval"  setting  screen  will  be
displayed.
• Select "OFF" to not set nozzle check. Proceed to
the Step 11.
4
Press the   key.
5
Press    to  select  a  setting  item,
and press the   key.
• Select the  nozzle check  interval  from  "LENGTH"
or "FILE".
LENGTH:  Nozzle  check  is  conducted  when  the
printed length reaches the set length.
FILE: Nozzle  check  is  conducted  when  the
number of printed files reaches the set
number.
6
Press    to  select  a  setting,  and
press the   key.
• The  set  value  will  differ  according  to  the  setting
selected in Step 5.
LENGTH: 0.1 to 30.0 m
FILE: 1 to 100 files
7
Press the   key twice.
• The "Action" setting screen appears.
8
Press    and then press the
   key.
• "CLEANING TYPE" will be selected.
9
Press    to  select  a  cleaning  time,
and press the   key.
Setting value: OFF/SOFT/ NORMAL/ HARD
10
Press   to select a retry count, and
press the   key.
Setting value: 0 to 3
11
When  you  are  finished  setting  "Printing
Check", press the   key several
times.
Setting of the NOZZLE RECOVERY
Set this if you want to conduct automatic nozzle recovery
when nozzle missing is detected.
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
 (three times) 
.
• The NOZZLE CHECK MENU appears.
2
Press   to select "NOZZLE 
RECOVERY", and press the  key.
3
Press    to  select  ON/OFF,  and
press the   key.
4
When  you  are  finished  setting  "NOZZLE
RECOVERY",  press  the    key
several times.
Setting of the Judgment Condition
Set the conditions for judging nozzle missing.
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU) 
 (three times) 
.
• The NOZZLE CHECK MENU appears.
2
Press   to select "Judgment 
Condition", and press the   key.
3
Press the   key to select a color.
4
Press   to set the number of 
nozzles for judgment, and press the 
 key.
5
When you are finished setting "Judgment 
Condition", press the   key 
several times.
• The type of color changes depending on 
the ink set.




Chapter 3 INFORMATION MENU
3-26
About INFORMATION MENU
The information of this machine can be confirmed.
The following items can be confirmed as machine information.
INFORMATION
USAGE
>
>
VERSION
>
LIST
>
>
INK REPLACE REPORT
ERROR HISTORY
four
times
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL MENU
SETUP
>
>
MAINTENANCE
>
MACHINE SETUP
NOZZLE CHECK
>
>
INFORMATION
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
Press  this  to  confirm  a
setting, etc.
Press this to select 
INFORMATION MENU, or 
to switch to the previous 
screen.
Press  this  to  switch  to  the
next screen.
Use  these  to  select  a
setting item.





Chapter 3 INFORMATION MENU
3-27
1
2
3
4
5
6
INFORMATION MENU table
Displaying the Information
1
In LOCAL mode, press 
 (MENU)   (four times) 
.
• The information menu appears.
2
Press   to select the information you want to view.
• Refer to the "INFORMATION MENU", and select the information to be displayed.
3
Press the   key.
• If you selected [LIST] in step 2, the machine's settings will be printed.
4
When you are finished displaying information, press the   key several times.
Item Meaning
USAGE
WIPING This displays how many wipings have been done.
WASTE TANK
This displays how much waste ink has built up in the waste ink tank, as a rough 
percentage of the tank capacity.
PRINT LENGTH This displays the total length of the printing done to date.
PRINT AREA This displays the total area of the printing done to date.
USE TIME This displays the total time for which the machine has been used to date.
UV LAMP This displays the total time of UV irradiation.
VERSION This displays the version information of this machine.
LIST This allows you to print the settings of this machine.
Ink REPL. Report This prints ink history of this machine.
ERROR HISTORY
This displays a history of errors and warnings that have occurred to date.
When you press [][], the date of occurrence (year/month/day/hour/minute) and the 
error/warning information are displayed alternately in the order of occurrence.
• To reset the use count of the wiper, press the [FUNC2] key. When you press the [ENTER] key, the number of wipings is 
reset.
• You can reset the use counts by pressing the [FUNC1] or [FUNC2] key while “WIPING information” or “WASTE TANK 
information” is displayed in USAGE as follows:
[FUNC2]: Resets the used count for "WIPING".
[FUNC1]: Resets the used count for "WASTE TANK".




3-28
Chapter 3 INFORMATION MENU
Displaying the machine's information
(LOCAL guidance)
1
Press the   key in LOCAL
• The  subsequent  information  is  displayed  every
time the [ENTER] key is pressed.
 INK INFORMATION
Displays the ink type, ink  remaining amount,
and ink errors.
 WARNING INFORMATION
Displays all warnings that occur. This screen
is displayed if any warning occurs.
 OTHER EVENT INFORMATION
Displays  the  Detected  media  width,  Head
height,  Machine  serial  number,  firmware
version,  command  version,  and  LAN
connection status.
 NOZZLE CHECK
Displays the number of defective nozzles for
each color that is detected by nozzle check.
2
Press  the    or    key
several times to return to LOCAL
LUS170
1.  100% No error
2.  100% No error
3.  100% No error
4.  100% No error
LUS170
1.  100% No error
2.  100% No error
3.  100% No error
4.      0% INK END
WARNING EVENT
!MEDIA UNDETECTED
INFORMATION
MEDIA WIDTH 1610mm
HEAD HEIGHT LOW
SERIAL No. xxxxxxxx
UCJV300-160 V1.3.0
MRL-V V1.30

INFORMATION
LAN Status 1000Mbyte

NOZZLE CHECK
C0
M0
Y0
K0




This chapter
describes about cutting function.
Cut Out Data with Register Mark ................... 4-2
The Flow of Cutting out the Registered 
Data.............................................................  4-2
Enter register mark detection mode ............  4-2
Precautions for inputting data with register 
marks ..........................................................  4-2
Settings for Detecting register marks ..........  4-5
ID Cut .......................................................... 4-6
About CUTTING MENU ...............................4-11
Cutting MENU table ..................................  4-12
Setting the CUT MODE................................4-13
Perform Multiple Cuttings (Copy function) ...4-13
SETUP SUB MENU .....................................4-14
Make the media without uncut area 
(OVER CUT function) ................................ 4-15
Other SETUP SUB MENU......................... 4-15
SETUP RESET.......................................... 4-16
Maintenance Function..................................4-17
Maintenance of Mark Sensor..................... 4-17
Perform SAMPLE CUT to Find out the 
Cause of Cutting Error............................... 4-19
Cutting a Medium into Multiple Pieces with 
a Certain Length ........................................ 4-19
Cutting out Data without Register Marks 
(PC ORIGIN OFFSET) .............................. 4-20
Setting the Scale Adjust............................. 4-21
Chapter 4
Cutting Function





4-2
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
Cut Out Data with Reg-
ister Mark
Create register marks on an output image that you want to
make a seal,  and the machine  detects them  to cut  them
out.
There are the following three types of register marks.
The Flow of Cutting out the Regis-
tered Data
Enter register mark detection mode
1
Press  (TEST CUT) in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “MARK 
DETECTION”, and press the   key.
• The  machine  enters  register  mark  detection
mode.
Precautions for inputting data with 
register marks
There are some limitations to preparing data with register
marks.
In order to make full use of this function, read the following
instructions  carefully  to  correctly  prepare  data  with
register marks.
Size of register marks
In  addition,  for the  length of  one  the  side  of the  register
mark compared to the data, refer to "Size of and distance
between register marks" ( P.4-4).
Make sure that the line width of the register mark is larger
than 1/10 the length of register mark.
• Use the TP4 when performing trapezium compen-
sation to correct the uneven sheet feeding rate 
caused by the difference in the diameter between 
the right and left grit rollers. If the trapezium com-
pensation is to be omitted, there is no need to set 
the TP4. In that case, however, cutting distortion 
will increase.

register mark: Type 1
register mark: Type 2
register mark: Zero Margin

Add register marks to the 
image that you want to make a 
seal, and print it on a sheet.
Set the printed sheet in the 
machine.
Send the cut-target image from 
the computer for cutting.
There are some 
conditions for creating 
register marks.
See pages P.4-2 
through P.4-4.
Refer to P.2-4 to set 
the sheet.
In case it is not 
successfully cut,
• Check the register 
mark sensor.
• Check the position 
of the Light Pointer.

• When register detection is set to OFF, the machine 
doesn’t enter register mark detection mode. 
(P.4-5)
• While various functions are being set, data entry 
may be canceled and the machine may go back to 
the previous setting item.
• The register mark described here is intended to 
detect the sheet inclination and the lengths along 
the X and Y axes. It is not a mark for trimming.

0.5~2.0mm
4~40mm





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-3
4
2
2
Area where register marks and designs 
can be arranged
The placeable range for the register mark and the image
is as follows.
• Set the start position of the register mark at 100 mm or more 
from the media front end.
• Set the end position of the register mark at 110 mm or more 
from the media rear end.
• When the data is copied by using RasterLink, make sure to 
leave a space of 210 mm or larger at the tail end of the sheet.
Mark Shape:
 Type 1
Mark Shape: Type 2
No-plotting area around the register 
marks
The area around a register mark (from the mark origin to
the mark size area) is a non-plotting area. There must be
no data plotted and no stains in this area; otherwise, the
origin  may  be  detected  incorrectly  or  a  mark  read  error
could occur.
Incorrect detection example 1
When there is a line outside the register marks
Incorrect detection example 2
When the distance between register marks (TP2 and TP1
or TP4 and TP2) is smaller than the mark length (for Type
2)

Area where cutting is permitted
Available cutting area
110mm or 210mm more
 Between 50mm to 
3000 mm
20 mm or more
50 mm or more
5mm or more5mm or more
Rear
Front

Area where cutting is permitted
Available cutting area
110mm or 210mm + 
(register mark length / 2) or 
more
Between 50mm to 
3000 mm
50 mm or more
20 mm+ (register mark 
length / 2) or more
5mm or more5mm or more
Rear
Front

• If the mark origin is detected incorrectly, cutting will 
be performed in the wrong area.

Mark length
register mark: Type 1
No-plotting area
Mark
Mark Origin
register mark: Type 2
Mark length
No-plotting area

No-plotting
area
Mark Origin
Mark origin detected 
incorrectly

Space larger
than the mark
length
Space larger 
than the mark 
length





4-4
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
Size of and distance between register 
marks
The size (Y) of a register mark suited for the distance (X)
between the marks is as shown below.
If the mark size (Y) is too small relative to the distance (X),
the  marks  may  not  be  detected  correctly.  Be  sure  to
prepare appropriately sized register marks.
Units (mm)
Distance between register marks for 
copied designs
For  Type  1  register  marks,  the  distance  between  the
marks must be no shorter than two times the mark length
and no longer than 1000 mm. For Type 2 register marks,
the distance between the marks must be no shorter than
the mark length and no longer than 1000 mm.
Recommended size of the area defined 
with a set of four register marks
It is recommended that the size of the area defined with a
set of four register marks is in the range of A4 size (210
mm x 297 mm) to A3 size (297 mm x 420 mm).
When printing register marks 
continuously
When printing register marks continuously, set one side of
the  register  mark  to  8  mm.  If  8  mm  or  shorter  register
marks  are detected  continuously,  glitches might  occur  in
the machine.
Mark color
Marks  must  be  printed  in  black  against  a  white
background.
register  marks  will  not  be  detected  correctly  if  the
background is not white or the marks are not black.
Blurred marks
If  a  mark  is  blurred,  the  mark  origin  might  be  detected
incorrectly, thus resulting in deviated cutting.
X 200 max. 500 max. 1000 max. 2000 max. 2001 min.
Y 5 to 40 8 to 40 15 to 40 25 to 40 35 to 40

register mark: Type 1
Distance between register
marks =
Between mark length (X) 
x2 and 1000 mm
Distance between 
register marks =
Between mark length 
(X) and 1000 mm
register mark: Type 2

A4 size (210mm 
x 297mm) to A3 
size (297mm x 
420mm)

8 mm or more





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-5
4
2
2
Notes for combined of printing & cutting
When using the attached application software to perform
the combined operation of print & cut, be careful with the
following:
(1) When performing combined of printing & cutting 
with the attached application software to this  
machine (RasterLink / FineCut), the following set 
contents will follow the instruction of the 
software side. Note that the contents set in this  
machine will be invalid.
• Mark length
• Mark shape
(2) For the combined operation of print & cut 
without register marks, you can perform print & 
cut using the take-up device, but it might be 
misaligned. 
Settings for Detecting register marks
When  you  want to  cut  the  data with  register  marks,  you
must set the following without fail.
1
Press the
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select “MARK 
DETECTION”, and press the   key.
3
Press    to  select  the  setting  item,
and press the   key.
• Refer  to  "Setting  items  for  detecting  register
marks" ( P.4-5).
4
Press   to select the “CUT MODE”,
and then press the   key.
• Setting value: Standard, High Speed, High Quality
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Setting items for detecting register 
marks
There  are  the  following  seven  setting  items  for  register
mark detection.
(1) MARK DETECT
(2) FORM
Select  either  one  of  the  following  types  of  register
marks.
(3) SIZE
Set  the  length  of  one  side  of  the
register mark.
Setting value: 5~40mm
• Other than the above conditions, there is a possi-
bility of the cutting line being misaligned depend-
ing on the printing data size. Therefore, it is also 
recommended to perform the operation with data 
which has register marks for combined printing & 
cutting.
• You can set the register mark detection without 
pressing [FUNC1] (MENU) from LOCAL.
(1) Press  the  [SEL]  key  twice  in  LOCAL  to
display "TEST CUT".
(2) Press [FUNC2] (TEST CUT).
(3) Press [ ▲ ][ ▼ ] to select [MARK DETECT]
(4) Press the [ENTER] key.
• After this, go to step 3 of "Settings for Detecting 
register marks".
Setting Value Description
ON/OFF
The register marks can be detected if this is set 
to ON.
• Use the copy function of cutting software, in the 
case of continuous cut, select the register mark of 
Zero margin, and you will be able to place no mar-
gin between the register marks.
To eliminate the margin between the register 
marks to cut efficiently, we recommend using the 
"Zero Margin" mark shape.
Setting Value Description
Type 1
Type 2
Zero margin

Length of one 





4-6
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
(4) OFFSET X / OFFSET Y
Generally  the origin will be  set  at the  position shown
below.
However, depending on your application and the work
to be cut, the cutting position may be misaligned in the
same direction. In this case, the location of the origin
can be corrected.
(5) DETECT END KEY START
(6) SENSOR LEVEL
(7) MARK FILL UP
ID Cut
It is a function that can cut automatically according to the
ID information simply by detecting the ID-contained data.
It  is  not  necessary  to  output  the  cut  data  again  after
printing the data.
For details, refer to "ID Cut Guide".
Print data
If you cut the media rotated by 90, 180, or 270 degrees,
set  the  media  margins  to the  following  values  at  rotated
conditions.
• Front end :  20 mm or more
• Left and right ends :  15 mm or more
• Rear end : 110 mm or more
210 mm or more (if a register mark copy 
*1
 has been made)
*1:  The data whose register mark copy has been made more than one
by RasterLink.
1
Set the media.
2
Check if the print start position (the origin )
is set at 110 mm or more from the media
front  end,  and  15  mm  or  more  from  the
media right end.
• Make sure that the width of the media is equal to
or  larger  than  [Entire  image  width  (including  the
register mark) + right 15 mm + left 15 mm].
• If any of the front / left / right margin is insufficient,
the  media  end  may  be  mistaken  as  the  register
mark,  which  may  cause  the  register  mark
detection to start earlier.
(1) Press the jog key in the local state. Move the
luminous point of the LED pointer so that the
print  start  position  is  100  mm  or  more  from
the  media  front  end,  and  15  mm  or  more
from the right end.
(2) Press the [ENTER] key.
• The print start position is changed.
3
Check if the print end position is set at 110
mm or 210 mm (if the mark copy has been
made) from the media rear end.
• Make sure that the length of the media is equal to
or larger than [Entire image length (including the
register mark) + 100 mm + 110 mm or 210 mm(if
the mark copy has been made)].
Setting Value Description
± 15.00 mm
Use this to shift the origin position in the X 
direction or Y direction.
• If the origin is located out of the available cutting 
area, “ERR37 MARK ORG” will be displayed. In 
this case, write the register marks in the area 
closer to the center of the media.
Setting Value Description
ON/OFF
If this is ON, you will be able to detect crop 
marks with the [END] key.
• When set to ON, the cutter head moves when the 
power is turned off.
Setting Value Description
1 to 7
The bigger the numerical value is, the higher 
the sensitivity of the register mark sensor 
becomes. If register marks are not detected, 
increase the sensitivity. If register marks are 
detected by mistake, lower the sensitivity.
Generally, use it with the setting value of “4”.
Setting Value Description
ON/OFF
Make the setting to “ON” when using the “Fill 
around the register mark” function of the RIP 
software to detect the printed register mark.
Use a register mark size of 10 mm or more 
when filling in around the register mark.

Mark: Type 1 Mark: Type 2
Origin
Origin
Plus Y
direction
Plus X directionPlus X direction
Plus Y
direction





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-7
4
2
2
4
In the local state, press the   
(  key ).
• This switches to the remote state.
5
Print data.
Mark Shape: Type 1
 (Outer register mark)]
Mark Shape: Type 2
 (Inner register mark)]

Patterns placeable range
Effective cut range
110 or 210 mm or more
70mm to 3000 mm
110 mm or more
70 mm or more
15 mm or more15 mm or more
Rear
Front

Patterns placeable range
Effective cut range
100 mm or 210 mm + 
(half the length of the 
register mark) or more
70mm + register 
mark to 3000mm
70 mm or more
110 mm + (half the length 
of the register mark) or 
more
15 mm or more15 mm or more
Rear
Front





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-8
Setting of Detecting the Registration Marks
1
Press the   (MENU)   (>>)   keys in LOCAL
2
Press   to select “CUTTING”, and then press the   key
3
Select “MARK DETECT”, and then press the   key.
4
Press the   key.
5
Press   to make settings for the following items, and then press the   key
Item Value Set value
DETECT AREA -
You can configure various settings for the register mark 
operation.
SCAN DIR.
DEFAULT,
0 cm,
5 cm to the  
machine width
Configure the detection width for the scanning direction. The 
register mark is detected while scanning is performed 
bidirectionally at the set detection width.
• DEFAULT:   The register mark is detected at half the 
media width.
• 0 cm:   The register mark is detected only in 
the feed (media feed) direction.
• 5 cm to the  machine width:  The register mark is detected with the 
set width.
FEED DIR. 10 cm to 50 cm Set the detection distance in the feed (media feed) direction.
OFFSET X 0 cm to 100 cm Set the Detection start position after the ID Cut.
About [DETECT AREA].
• SCAN DIRECTION, FEED DIRECTION, OFFSET X are as following.

FEED 
DIRECTION
Detection start position
SCAN DEIRECTION
OFFSET X
Scan path for Auto MARK DETECT
The ID Cut end 
position for the 
data 
immediately 
before
[Front]
[Rear]





4-9
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4
2
2
ID Cutting
1
Set the printed media.
• Roll media: 「Setting a Roll Media」(P.2-11)
• Leaf media:「Setting Leaf Media」(P.2-15)
2
Detect the register mark
(1) Press the   in LOCAL.
(2) Press [] []key to select [MARK DETECTION], and press the   key.
• This switches to the mark detection mode.
(3) Press the [] [] [] [] keys to move the luminous point of the LED pointer to the center of the register 
mark.
(4) Press the   key.
• The register mark is detected.
• The printer is in remote mode.
3
The cut data is automatically received and cut.
• After the ID Cut, the next register mark will be automatically detected.
4
If you have multiple pieces of data, [Auto detection -> ID Cut ] is repeated until all pieces of data
are finished.
• If you print multiple register marks and perform ID Cut, set the same shape and size for all the register marks. If any of the
register marks has a different size or shape, the ID Cut is canceled.
• You can set the area for MARK DETECT in the Mark detect area settings.

Mark Shape: Type 1 
Mark Shape: Type 2

Because the shape of  the register mark  is different,
an error occurs and the ID Cut is canceled.
Mark Shape: Type2
Cutting direction
Mark Shape: Type1
Mark Shape: Type1





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-10
• When  there  are  multiple  types  of  data,  the  register  mark's  auto  detection  direction  is  set  to  FEED  (media  feed)
direction.
• You cannot detect register marks automatically in the scan direction. When the data is laid out in the scan direction, detect 
the register marks manually.

Scan path for 
Manual MARK 
DETECT
Feed (media feed) 
direction.
Scanning direction
3. The next register 
mark will be 
automatically 
detected.
1. Detects the register 
marks manually.
2. Use COPY to 
perform cutting 
automatically.
4. Copied data, so it 
is cut automatically.

The register mark is not 
automatically detected. Detect 
the register mark manually.
Feed (media feed) direction.
Scanning direction
1. Detects the register 
marks manually.
2. Use COPY to perform 
cutting automatically.
3. Registration marks cannot be 
detected because there is no data.
Scan path for Manual MARK 
DETECT





4-11
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4
2
2
About CUTTING MENU
In the cutting menu, you can configure a variety of settings regarding cutting functions.

MENU
Cutting
>
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
>><<
Cutting
TP DETECT
>
CUT MODE
NORMAL
>
COPY
>
TOOL CHANGE
>
SETUP SUB MENU
>><<
Cutting
MAINTENANCE
>
>><<
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL

Press this to confirm a 
setting, etc..
 Cutting MENUs at-a-glance
Press this to select SETUP 
MENU, or to switch to the 
previous screen.
Press this to switch to the 
next screen.
Use these to select a setting 
item.





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-12
Cutting MENU table
• For each setting item below, you can set it so that the machine may operate according to the value specified when you 
printed from your RIP software in the connected host PC.
• When you operate the machine according to the contents specified with the RIP software, set each item to “Host” when 
registering this machine type. When you set it other than “Host”, the machine operates according to the machine setting.
• For the specifying method with the RIP software, refer to the operation manual of the RIP software.
Function name Description
TP DETECT ( P.4-5)
MARK DETECT
When you cut the data with register marks, you must set 
without fail.
FORM
SIZE
OFFSET X
OFFSET Y
DETECT END KEY START
SENSOR LEVEL
MARK FILL UP
DETECT AREA
CUT MODE ( P.4-13) This is to set the cutting quality.
COPY ( P.4-13)
This function performs cutting for the received data on two or 
more sheets.
Tool Change( P.2-24, P.2-24) You select this function when you replace the tool.
SETUP SUB MENU
UP SPEED ( P.4-15)
This is to set the speed of sheet and carriage movement when 
the tool is up.
Setting the speed lower makes the sheet misalignment 
reduced at the time of long sheet feeding.
DUMMY CUT ( P.4-15)
The blade edge is made to turn to a specific direction before 
starting cutting, which allows dummy cutting.
SHEET TYPE ( P.4-15) This is to set the types of sheet according to the sheet you use.
ADJ PRS OFFSET ( P.4-15)
This is used to expand the value in such a case as when the 
beginning and end part of the cut are left cut.
Vacuum fan
Set the strength of the vacuum fan at cutting.
Please use "weak" normally.
OVER CUT ( P.4-15)
By over lapping the start point and the end point arbitrarily, you 
can make the media without uncut area.
Curve mode
If the cut line bends, set it to "SLOW".
Although the cutting speed decreases, it is possible to prevent 
a bent.
RESET SETTING ( P.4-16) Reset the setting values to the initial state.
MAINTENANCE 
MARK sensor ( P.4-17) This is for adjusting the register mark sensor.
SAMPLE CUT ( P.4-19)
In case that normal data cutting cannot be performed etc., 
perform cutting with the sample stored in this machine to find 
out the cause of cutting error.
AUTO MEDIA CUT( P.4-19) Cutting a medium into multiple pieces with a certain length.
SCALE ADJUST( P.4-21)
When printing and cutting without register marks, adjustment is 
performed if the misalignment in the scanning direction occurs 
between the left and right edges of the media.





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-13
4
2
2
Setting the CUT MODE
This is to set the cutting quality.
There are the following three types for cut mode.
1
Press the
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press  to select the "CUT MODE",
and press the   key.
3
Press    to  select  the  setting  item,
and press the   key.
• Setting value: Standard, High Speed, High Quality
4
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Perform Multiple Cut-
tings (Copy function)
This function performs cutting for the received data on two
or more sheets. (Max. 999 sheets)
• You can perform the multiple-sheet cutting for the data saved 
in the reception buffer of this machine.
• The receiving buffer can save only one data.
• When a new data is received, the data that has been saved is 
overwritten by it.
(You cannot perform multiple cuttings by specifying the data 
that was received before.)
1
Press the 
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "COPY", and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select the number of 
cuttings (1 to 999), and press the 
key.
4
Press    to  select  the  interval  of
figures  to  be  cut  (0  to  30  mm),  and  press
the   key.
Setting Value Description
Standard This is a regular cutting mode.
High speed
This is used to perform cutting in a short time. 
(It is not appropriate for heavy media.)
High quality
This is a cutting mode used to give priority to 
cutting quality.
• Select “QUALITY” in any of the following cases:
• Characters whose sizes are 10 mm or less are to 
be cut
• Picture patterns or characters that have many 
sharp corners are to be cut
• Minute cutting is to be performed However, the 
edges of finished patterns may be rugged if the 
data sent from the host computer is too compli-
cated. In such a case, select “HIGHspd” for 
smooth finish.
• With “QUALITY”, the cutting speed is limited to 20 
cm/s.
• If the multiple sheet cutting is executed immedi-
ately after cutting in the remote mode, cutting 
(plotting) will be overlapped. To avoid this trouble, 
be sure to set the new origin.
• While the machine is executing the multiple sheet 
cutting, it ignores data sent from the computer.
• To send two or more pieces of data from the com-
puter to the machine, the data has to be sent while 
providing an interval of 5 seconds or more 
between any two pieces of data. If two pieces of 
data are sent from the computer to the machine 
within 5 seconds, the two pieces of data will be 
subjected to the multiple sheet cutting. The 
machine performs cutting for divided cutting data 
by the specified number of sheets without dividing 
the data. If any error is displayed, refer to “Error 
messages” ( P.6-7).
• If there is the origin renewal command in cutting 
data, you cannot perform copy function.
When you use FineCut, the default value of Origin 
Renewal is “ON”. If you perform [No. COPIES], 
uncheck the checkbox. (Refer to FineCut OPERA-
TION MANUAL Chapter5 “Setting Head Position 
after Plotting”)

COPY
INTERVAL
Origin position at the 
end of multiple cuts.
Origin position when 
performing multiple 
cuts
Feed direction
Scan direction





4-14
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
SETUP SUB MENU
The  SETUP  SUB  MENU  offer  convenient  functions  that
you can use in cutting.
The following items are available in the sub menus.
Function name Description
UP SPEED
(P.4-15)
This is to set the speed of sheet and 
carriage movement when the tool is up.
Setting the speed lower makes the sheet 
misalignment reduced at the time of long 
sheet feeding.
DUMMY CUT 
(P.4-15)
The blade edge is made to turn to a 
specific direction before starting cutting, 
which allows dummy cutting.
SHEET TYPE
(P.4-15)
Set this according to the weight of the 
media you have set. When this is set to 
"HEAVY", the maximum cutting speed is 
set low.
ADJ PRS OFFSET
(P.4-15)
This is used to expand the value in such 
a case as when the beginning and end 
part of the cut are left cut.
Vacuum fan
Set the strength of the vacuum fan at 
cutting.
Please use "weak" normally.
OVER CUT
(P.4-15)
By over lapping the start point and the 
end point arbitrarily, you can make the 
media without uncut area.
Curve mode
If the cut line bends, set it to "SLOW".
Although the cutting speed decreases, it 
is possible to prevent a bent.
SETUP RESET
(P.4-16)
Reset the setting values to the initial 
state.





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-15
4
2
2
Make the media without uncut area (OVER CUT function)
By over lapping the start point and the end point arbitrarily, you can make
the media without uncut area.
Specify  the  OVER  CUT  function  (valid/invalid)  and  the  length  of the
OVER CUT. If the length of the OVER CUT is set, when cut starts, cut will
be performed from the position to the front by the specified length and the
tool will move up going too far at the end.
Additionally, you can enable the corner cut function to perform overcutting
of corners other than the start and end points.
1
Press the
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select the "SETUP SUB
MENU", and press the   key.
3
Press   to select "OVER CUT", and
press the   key.
4
Press   to select the setting item
and press the   key.
• Set  value:  OFF/  0.1  to  1.0  m  (in  0.1  mm
increment)       
• When you press the [ENTER] key, the setting for
“CORNER CUT” setting will be displayed.
5
Press   to select ON/OFF, and 
press the   key.
6
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
Other SETUP SUB MENU
How to set other convenient functions is explained below. Change the settings according to the types of use.
1
Press the
 (MENU)  (>>)
  key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select the "SETUP SUB
MENU", and press the   key.
3
Press    several  times,  and  select  an
item to set.
• See "List of Settings" to select one.
4
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select a set value.
• See "List of Settings" to select one.
6
and press the   key.
7
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
List of Settings
The setting is as follows when purchasing:
• Setting proper OVER CUT 
can reduce uncut area of 
start and end point of a 
media easy to bend. If too 
large value is set, the result 
may have a rupture.

OVER CUT : OFF
OVER CUT : 1.0mm

OVER CUT 
part
Corner cut 
part

• The setting values are kept in memory even when 
the power is turned off.
Function name Description Setting Value 
*1
Setting the UP SPEED
This is to set the speed of sheet and carriage movement when the tool is up.
Setting the speed lower makes the sheet misalignment reduced at the 
time of long sheet feeding.
5,10,20,30, AUTO (cm/s)
Setting the DUMMY CUT ( P.4-16) The operation of dummy cutting is set. OFF / ON
SHEET TYPE 
*2
This is to set the types of sheet according to the sheet you use. Standard / Heavy
Setting the ADJ-PRS OFFSET 
(P.4-16)
This is used to expand the value in such a case as when the 
beginning and end part of the cut are left cut.
0 ~ 3
 ~ 7
Curve mode
If the cut line bends, set it to "SLOW".
Although the cutting speed decreases, it is possible to prevent a bent.
SLOW / FAST
*1. The underlined values are set at purchase.
*2. If you set “Heavy” for the media setting, the cutting speed will be limited to 20 cm/s.





4-16
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
About Dummy Cutting
This  is  performed  after  detecting  the  media  or  when
changing the tool type in front of the pinch roller which is
near the  both  ends from the  position of the cutter unit is
placed presently.
Set the dummy cutting function to OFF when you do not
want to damage the media in cutting cut-out characters.
About Pressure Correction Offset (ADJ-
PRS OFFSET)
Some part of a media is left uncut because the pressure
applied when the cutter blade touches the media is weak.
When an optional eccentric blade is used, some part of a
media to be cut with the blade's angle being 120 degrees
or less may be left uncut.
This is because  the  corners are  cut with  a  low pressure
(about 5 g) automatically applied so that the media does
not  turn  up.  Some  part  of  a  media  may  be  left  uncut
because  the  blade  edge  does  not  rotate  smoothly  in  its
moving  direction  with  the  cutting  pressure  being  low.  In
such a case, configure the setting for the pressure to be
increased when the corners are cut.
SETUP RESET
Reset the setting values to the initial state.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select the "SETUP SUB
MENU", and press the   key.
3
Press 
 (>>)
, and press   twice.
• “SETUP RESET” will be selected.
4
Press the   key.
• The already configured settings are initialized.
5
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
• When “PEN” is selected for the tool condition, the 
dummy cutting cannot be set.
• The default of the dummy cutting function is ON.
When you have set the dummy cutting function to 
OFF, perform test cutting ( P.2-28) to adjust the 
cutter blade orientation before cutting.

Pinch roller
Dummy cut





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-17
4
2
2
Maintenance Function
This section gathers  together  the functions  for checking/
adjusting  the  cutting  accuracy  when  cutting  does  not  go
normally.
Maintenance of Mark Sensor
If cutting does not go normally, check the items below.
In  register  mark  sensor  maintenance,  you  can  carry  out
maintenance of the following items.
Check the sensor for the register mark 
detection 
Prepare the media on which the register mark is printed.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press 
 (>>)
.
3
Press   to select 
"MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
4
Press   to select "MARK 
SENSOR", and press the   key.
5
Press   to select "SENSOR 
CHECK", and press the   key.
6
Press    to  move  LED
pointer to register mark detection position
• Perform register mark detection at a position 1mm
or more away from the register mark.
7
Select the length of the register mark and 
shape of the register mark detection.
• For  details  on  setting  the  [SIZE]  and  [FORM],
refer  to  the  ”Settings  for  Detecting  register
marks”.  ( P.4-5)
8
Press  the    to  perform  register
mark detection.
 (  "Detect operation")
Function name Description
MARK sensor 
(P.4-17)
This is for adjusting the register mark 
sensor.
SAMPLE CUT
(P.4-19)
In case that normal data cutting 
cannot be performed etc., perform 
cutting with the sample stored in this 
machine to find out the cause of 
cutting error.
AUTO MEDIA CUT
(P.4-19)
Cutting a medium into multiple pieces 
with a certain length.
PC ORIGIN OFFSET
(P.4-20)
Adjust the misalignment between the 
print origin and the cutting origin.
SCALE ADJUST
(P.4-20)
When printing and cutting without 
register marks, adjustment is 
performed if the misalignment in the 
scanning direction occurs between the 
left and right edges of the media.
Item Description
SENSOR CHECK
(P.4-17)
checking the sensor for the register 
mark detection.
POINTER OFFSET 
(P.4-18)
If the cutter unit fails to recognize any 
register mark properly, the possible 
cause is an error in the positional 
relationship between the mark sensor 
and the light pointer. In this case, 
correct the position of the light pointer.
• If you move the head and sheet manually, you 
cannot perform the right response check. Be sure 
to perform it via the following operations.
• For conditions of already printed register marks, 
refer to "Precautions for inputting data with register 
marks" ( P.4-2).
• The setting values are kept in memory even when 
the power is turned off.
• The settings performed here for shape of the 
register mark and length of the register mark are 
reflected in the settings of “MARK DETECT”.
( P.4-5) 
• The detection speed selected here will be used in 
the register mark detection operations that are 
executed from here on.
• The pointer offset value selected by this operation 
is not initialized by SETUP RESET operation.

1mm or more
Mark detection
position
Mark shape
: Type 1
Mark shape
: Type 2





4-18
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
 Detect operation
1
Scan  in  the X  direction (plus  direction)  to
detect the line.
• The  buzzer  sounds  when  the  line  is  detected.  If
the  line  is  not  detected,  the  buzzer  does  not
sound.
2
Scan in the X direction (minus direction) to
detect the line.
3
Scan  in  the Y  direction (plus  direction)  to
detect the line.
4
Scan in the Y direction (minus direction) to
detect the line.
5
Follow the Steps 1 to 4, and confirm if the
buzzer sounds 4 times.
• When the detection behavior completes 
successfully, the buzzer sounds 4 times.
• If the buzzer does not sound, contact our service
desk or your local distributor for service.
Correct the light pointer position 
If  the  machine  fails  to  recognize  any  register  mark
properly,  the  possible  cause  is  an  error  in  the  positional
relationship  between  the  MARK  sensor  and  the  light
pointer. In this case, adjust the position of the light pointer.
1
Install a pen in the tool holder
2
Load the copy paper.
3
Press the 
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
4
Press 
 (>>)
.
5
Press   to select 
"MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
6
Press   to select "MARK 
SENSOR", and press the   key.
7
Press    to select "POINTER OFS",
8
Press the   key.
• A 10 mm by 10 mm cross pattern will be cut.
• The light pointer turns on and moves to the center
of the cross pattern.
9
Press   to adjust the light
pointer  position  so  that  the  center  of  the
light pointer is in alignment with the center
of the cross pattern.
10
Press the   key.
• The screen returns to LOCAL.

Minus 
direction
Plus direction
Mark length
Plus 
direction
Minus 
direction
Scan in the Y direction
Scan in the X direction

•  The value registered in the [POINTER OFS] is not 
initialized even by executing the "SETUP RESET" 
( P.4-16).





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-19
4
2
2
Perform SAMPLE CUT to Find out the
Cause of Cutting Error. 
In case that normal data cutting cannot be performed etc.,
perform cutting with the sample stored in this machine to
find out the cause of cutting error.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press 
 (>>)
.
3
Press   to select 
"MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
4
Press    to  select  the  "SAMPLE
CUT", and press the  key.
5
Press    to  select  the  SAMPLE
DATA to be cut.
• There are two types of samples, “Cut” and “Logo.”
If you select “Cut,” proceed to Step 8.
6
Press the   key.
7
Select    scale  factor  using  to  cut
Logo.
• Scale factor : 1 to 999%
8
Press the   key for starting cutting.
 
Result of SAMPLE CUT
Sample  data  can  be  cut  successfully,  but  other  data
cannot.
The host computer is faulty.
Sample data as well as other data cannot be successfully
cut either. 
The printer is faulty.
(When leaving the start/end lines without cutting off)
Increase the set  value  of [ADJ-PRS  OFS]  to raise  the
pressure for pressing the cutter blade down. P.4-15
Cutting a Medium into Multiple 
Pieces with a Certain Length
You  can  cut  a  medium  into  multiple  pieces  with  a
specified length. (Automatic media-cutting function)
1
Press the 
 (MENU)  (>>)
   key in LOCAL.
• The cutting MENU will be displayed.
2
Press 
 (>>)
.
3
Press   to select 
"MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
4
Press    to  select  "AUTO  MEDIA
CUT",and press the   key.
5
Press   to select a cutting interval,
and press the   key.
• Set value : 10 to 10,000 mm
6
Press    to  select  a  length  for  the
leading end adjustment cutting, and press
the   key.
• Set value : 0 to 500mm
7
Press    to  select  the  number  of
times  a  medium  is  cut  (number  of  pieces
produced by cutting a medium), and press
the   key.
• Set value : 1 to 9,999
• The  number  of  cuts  that  you  set  here  will  be
executed.
• You  can  halt  the  cutting  by  pressing  the  [END/
POWER] key.
8
Press the   key several times to
end the setting.
• Execution of SAMPLE CUT will clear the data in 
the receiver buffer.

Sample “Cut”
Sample “Logo”

Function name Description
Cutting interval Setting the interval for cutting the media.
Leading end 
adjustment cutting
Setting the length for cutting the medias’ 
leading edges before auto media cut starts.
You can cut off the leading end part of the 
media when the leading end of the media is 
cut at an angle or the cut surface is rough.
Number of times a 
medium is cut
Setting the number of times (sheets) for 
media cutting.





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-20
Cutting out Data without Register Marks (PC ORIGIN OFFSET)
Adjust the misalignment between printing and cutting by Print & Cut.
Use the attached RIP software (RasterLink) for this adjustment.
Print the adjustment pattern from RasterLink, and enter the adjustment values to the printer.
For Print & Cut without register marks
1
Set the machine to "REMOTE" status.
2
Set the print conditions (profile, cut conditions) of the job that you want to print using RasterLink.
3
Click [print & cut Origin adjust] in the [Cut edit] tab of
RasterLink.
• Click [OK] to print the adjustment pattern.
4
When the pattern is printed, press 
 (ADJUST)
 and select "PC ORIGIN OFFSET".
• When the media is fed, peal the cut part of the pattern, and check the adjustment values
5
Enter the adjustment values
• When you press the [ENTER] key, the media return, and the operation is completed.
• When printing the data that has a different resolution (Y), make adjustment again. (Save an adjustment value per resolu-
tion)
• You cannot print adjustment patterns with multiple conditions continuously, and enter the adjustment values. Make sure 
you print and set one adjustment value per condition.

Click

 
+ -
- +

X enlarged
Y enlarged
Enter the value of the position that has the 
least misalignment between top and bottom
The example here shows that -4 has the least 
misalignment, so enter “-4”.
Enter the value of the position that has the 
least misalignment between right and left
The example here shows that 2 has the least 
misalignment, so enter “2”.





4-21
Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4
2
2
For Print & Cut with register marks
1
Set the machine to "REMOTE" status.
2
Set the print conditions (profile, cut conditions) of the job that you want to print using RasterLink.
3
Click [print & cut Origin adjust] in the [Cut edit] tab of RasterLink.
4
Select "Add register mark".
• Click [OK] to print the adjustment pattern.
5
When the pattern is printed, press 
  (ADJUST)
 and select "TP OFFSET".
• When the media is fed, peal the cut part of the pattern, and check the adjustment values
(The actual pattern has register marks.)
6
Enter the adjustment values
• When you press the [ENTER] key, the media return, and the operation is completed.
Setting the Scale Adjust
When printing and cutting without register marks, adjustment is performed if the misalignment in the scanning direction
occurs between the left and right edges of the media.
When you perform scale adjustment, adjustment is performed automatically.
1
Set a media ( P.2-4)
• Set the sheet to print the register mark.
2
Press the   (MENU)     (>>)     keys
• Cutting menu is displayed.
3
Press   (<<)
4
Press   to select “MAINTENANCE”, and press the [ENTER] key
5
Press   to select "SCALE ADJUST", and press the   key
6
Press the    key on the confirmation screen
• A correction pattern is printed and correction is performed.
7
Press the   key several times to end the setting

 
+ -
- +

X enlarged
Y enlarged
Enter the value of the position that has the 
least misalignment between top and bottom
The example here shows that -4 has the least 
misalignment, so enter “-0.40”.
Enter the value of the position that has the 
least misalignment between right and left
The example here shows that 2 has the least 
misalignment, so enter “0.20”.





Chapter 4 Cutting Function
4-22





This chapter
describes the items required to use this machine more comfortably, which are the meth-
ods for the daily care, the maintenance of the ink cartridges etc.
Maintenance ..................................................5-2
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long 
Time ............................................................ 5-2
Precautions for Maintenance ......................  5-2
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces ...................  5-2
Cleaning the Platen.....................................  5-2
Cleaning the Media Sensor.........................  5-3
Cleaning the Media Press ...........................  5-3
About MAINTENANCE MENU.......................5-4
MAINTENANCE MENUs table....................  5-5
Maintaining the 
Capping Station .............................................5-6
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap .......................  5-6
Cleaning the mist filter ................................. 5-7
Clean the NCU  ............................................ 5-8
Washing the Head Nozzle...........................  5-9
Cleaning of ink discharge passage .............  5-9
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long 
Time ..........................................................  5-10
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area 
around It.......................................................5-12
Nozzle Recovery Function ...........................5-13
Reset the set value ...................................  5-14
Eliminate Ink Over Flow  ..............................5-14
Automatic Maintenance Function.................5-15
Setting the Refreshing Intervals................. 5-15
Setting the Cleaning Intervals and Type.... 5-15
INK FILLING.................................................5-16
AIR PURGE............................................... 5-16
Replacing consumables ...............................5-18
Replacing the wiper ................................... 5-18
Replacing the mist filter  .............................5-18
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message 
Appears ..................................................... 5-19
Replace the waste ink tank with another ... 5-19
Replacing the waste ink tank before the waste 
ink tank confirmation message is 
displayed.................................................... 5-20
Replacing the Cutter Blade........................ 5-20
Replacing and Adjusting the Cutter Blade ...5-21
Replacing the cutter................................... 5-21
Adjusting the Cutter Blade......................... 5-22
Replacing cutters other than supplied one  5-22
Adjusting blade edge of cutters other than 
supplied one .............................................. 5-22
Chapter 5
Maintenance





Chapter 5  Maintenance
5-2
Maintenance
Maintain the machine regularly or as necessary so that its
accuracy  will  be  maintained  and  it  can  continue  to  be
used for a long time.
When the Machine Is Not Used for a
Long Time
When the machine is not going to be used for a week or
more, clean the ink discharge passage. (  P.5-9) Then,
place the machine in storage.
Precautions for Maintenance
Pay attention to the following items when maintaining this
machine.
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces
When  the  exterior  surfaces  of  the  machine  are  stained,
dampen  a  soft  cloth  with  water  or  a  neutral  detergent
diluted with water, squeeze it, and wipe the surfaces with
the cloth.
Cleaning the Platen
The  platen  easily  gets  dirty  with  lint,  paper  dust,  etc.
generated when a media is cut.
Wipe off conspicuous stains with a  soft-hair brush,  a dry
cloth, a paper towel, etc.
• Always keep the main power turned “ON”.
• Remove any media that has been set.
• If water or alcohol becomes mixed into the UV 
curingink (UV ink), flocculation could occurred. Be 
careful to keep water and alcohol away from both-
the nozzles and the heads.
• This machine uses UV curing ink (UV ink).
When handling ink and cleaning solution, pay close 
attention to ventilation and be sure to wear the 
included safety glasses and gloves.
• Never disassemble this machine. Disassembling it 
can result in electric shock hazards or damage to 
the machine.
Before maintenance, be sure to turn off the power 
switch and unplug the power cable. Otherwise, an 
unexpected accident may occur.
• Prevent moisture from entering the machine. Mois-
ture inside the machine can cause electric shock 
hazards or damage to the machine.
• To ensure stable ink jetting, it is necessary for the 
machine to eject a small amount of ink (flushing) 
regularly when a printing (outputting) operation has 
not been performed for a long time.
• When the machine is not to be used for a long time, 
turn off only the power switch on the front side, 
leave the main power switch at the right side turned 
ON (in the position of | ), and leave the power cable 
connected.
• Do not wipe the nozzle face of the heads, wiper, 
caps, etc. with water or alcohol. Doing so can 
cause nozzle clogging or machine failure.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, or any chemical agent 
containing an abrasive. Such materials can deterio-
rate or deform the surface of the cover.
• Do not apply a lubricant, etc. to any parts inside the 
machine. Doing so can cause printing failure.
• Be careful that the cleaning solution, ink, etc. do 
not stick to the cover, because this may cause the 
surface of the cover to deteriorate or deform. 
• When the platen is stained with ink, wipe it off with 
a paper towel containing a small amount of clean-
ing solution for maintenance.
• When ink smears the end face of the media, be 
sure to clean it.
• When ink adheres frequently, we recommended to 
set the suction fan to "weak" or "standard".
• Because dust and dirt easily accumulate in the 
slots for holding a media and cutting paper (cutter 
line), be sure to clean these parts carefully. 




Chapter 5  Maintenance
5-3
5
2
Cleaning the Media Sensor
The  media  sensors  are  located  on  the  platen  in  the
backside and  the bottom surface  of the  head. When  the
sensor  is  covered  with  dust,  etc.,  it  may  cause  false
detection of media.
Using a cotton swab, remove the dust, etc. accumulated
on the surface of the sensor.
When  cleaning  the  sensor  on  the  lower  surface  of  the
head is cleaned, move the carriage to the left end by the
operations of step 1 of  P.5-12“Cleaning the Ink Head and
the Area around It”, and clean it.
Cleaning the Media Press
When the  media  press  is  covered  with lint,  dust, etc.,  a
media  cannot  be  fed  normally  during  printing  or  dust
sticks  to  the  nozzles,  which  may  result  in  abnormal
printing.
Clean the media press regularly.
Media sensor
The backside of the machine
The lower surface of the head
Media sensor

Media Press





5-4
Chapter 5  Maintenance
About MAINTENANCE MENU
This provides various settings for doing maintenance on the machine.
The following items can be set in Maintenance settings.

TEST PRINT
>
>
CLEANING
>
STATION MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
STATION
>
>
NOZZLE RECOVERY
>
AUTO MAINTENANCE
>
INK FILLING
>
INK TANK EXCHANGE
>><<
<<
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL
MAINTENANCE
OVERFLOW MAINTENANCE
>
AIR PURGE
>
>><<
MENU
SETUP
>
>
MAINTENANCE
>
MACHINE SETUP
NOZZLE CHECK
>
>
INFORMATION
>><<
width:1340mm
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT
CLEANING
LOCAL

 MAINTENANCE MENUs at-a-glance
 Screen transition when   key is pressed
Press this to confirm a 
setting, etc.
Press this to select 
MAINTENANCE MENU, or 
to switch to the previous 
screen.
Press this to use the 
maintenance function.
Use these to select a 
setting item.
Press this to use the 
maintenance function.





5-5
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
MAINTENANCE MENUs table
Item Setting Value Meaning
STATION
MAINTENANCE
For carrying out maintenance on the carriage and station periphery.
CARRIAGE OUT
(P.5-6)
Moves the carriage out, for carrying out cleaning of the cap 
periphery, head, wipers, etc.
NOZZLE WASH
(P.5-9)
Fixed to 1 min
Soaks the nozzle surfaces in maintenance cleaning fluid, for 
carrying out recovery from nozzle clogging or bent.
DISWAY WASH
(P.5-9)
Executes washing of the suction pump tubes.
CUSTODY WASH
( P.5-10)
Fixed to 1 min
Carried out when the machine is going to be out of use for an 
extended period. Washes the nozzles and tubes beforehand, 
to keep the machine in fine condition.
Replace WIPER
( P.5-18)
Used when replacing the wiper. If the wiper is replaced, the 
number of times the wiper was used that is managed in this  
machine is reset.
NOZZLE RECOVERY
( P.5-15)
For printing using another nozzle, if nozzle wash and so forth fail to effect recovery from nozzle clogging, etc.
PRINT Prints a pattern, to identify the nozzle that is clogged.
ENTRY Registers the faulty nozzle identified by “PRINT”.
RESET Resets a registered faulty nozzle.
AUTO 
MAINTENANCE
( P.5-15)
For having the various maintenance functions executed automatically. Set the execution interval for each 
maintenance function.
REFRESH
The set value will differ 
according to the ink 
type being used.
For setting the activation interval for refresh.
CLEANING (Interval) For setting the activation interval for head cleaning.
CLEANING
(TYPE)
NORMAL/ SOFT/ 
HARD
For setting the type of head cleaning.
INK FILLING
( P.5-16)
Supplies ink to correct nozzle clogging.
INK TANK 
EXCHANGE ( P.5-
20)
Resets or corrects the used count for the waste ink tank.
OVER FLOW 
MAINTENANCE 
( P.5-14)
For discharging excessive ink in the sub tank to solve the ink overflow problem.
AIR PURGE( P.5-
16)
For discharging ink and air that is in the head out of a port, to solve mixed color and nozzle clogging problems.





5-6
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Maintaining the 
Capping Station
Maintain  the  ink  cap,  wiper,  etc.  located  in  the  capping
station. 
(SATION MAINT.)
The ink cap and wiper function as follows.
• Wiper :  It wipes off ink sticking to the head nozzles.
• Ink cap :  It prevents the head nozzles from clogging due to 
dryness.
As the machine is used repeatedly, the wiper and ink cap
gradually become dirty with ink, dust, etc.
If  nozzle  missing  cannot  be  corrected  even  after  head
cleaning  ( P.2-19)  has  been  performed,  use  F-200  /
LF-200 maintenance liquid and clean stick.
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap
It  is  recommended  that  the  wiper  and  cap  be  cleaned
frequently  in  order  to  maintain  the  high  image  quality  of
the machine and keep the machine itself in good working
order.
1
1Press the   (MENU)
 
and press the   key in local.
• Display maintenance menu.
2
Press     to select "Station 
Maintenance" and press the   key.
3
Press     to select "Carriage Out" 
and press the   key.
4
Select “STATION MAINT.”, and then press 
the   key.
• The carriage moves over the platen.
5
Open the front cover.
6
Remove the wiper.
• Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its
both ends.
7
Clean the wiper and the bracket.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the wiper and bracket
with a clean  stick  dipped  in  cleaning solution for
maintenance.
Wipe off so that cleaning solution for maintenance
will not remain.
• To keep the nozzle status normal, perform wiper 
cleaning frequently.
Tools required for Maintenance
• F-200 / LF-200 maintenance liquid (SPC-0569)
• Nozzle swab (SPC-0421)
• Gloves • Safety glasses
• Never look at  the illuminated LED UV with your 
naked eyes. Doing so could cause pain in your 
eyes or visual impairment. Be sure to wear safety 
glasses.
• Do not expose your skin directly to ultraviolet (UV) 
light. Doing so could cause skin irritation.
• Be sure to wear the supplied safety glasses and 
gloves when maintaining the capping station. 
Doing so could cause the ink to leak.
• Do not move the carriage out of the capping sta-
tion by hand. When it is desirable to move the car-
riage, press the [FUNK1] key to execute the 
carriage-out. ( P.5-6Steps 1 to 2)
• Replace the wiper with a new one when it is 
extremely dirty or bent. ( P.5-18)
• When cleaning the wiper, be careful that lint from 
the clean stick does not get left on the wiper. 
Remaining lint may cause image quality to deterio-
rate.

Carriage

Projection

Wiper
Bracket





5-7
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
8
Clean the wiper cleaner.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the wiper cleaner with
a  clean  stick  dipped  in  cleaning  solution  for
maintenance.
9
Set the wiper at the original position.
• Insert the  wiper by  holding the  protrusions at  its
both ends.
10
Clean the cap rubber.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber with a
clean stick dipped in maintenance washing liquid
for maintenance.
• Wipe  off  so  that  maintenance  solution  for
maintenance will not remain.
11
Press the  key after the cleaning.
12
Close the front cover, and press the 
key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
step 1.
Cleaning the mist filter
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press the   key twice to select the 
“CARRIAGE OUT”.
3
Press   to select "HEAD 
MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
• The  carriage  will  move  to  the  left  end  of  this
machine.
• A large amount of ink accumulates in the absorp-
tion case. Please absorb with water-absorbing 
paper etc. about once a week.
• Do not remove the wiper cleaner from the bracket.
• Clean only the surface of the wiper on the wiper 
cleaner. (It is not necessary to clean the rear side.)
• Do not remove the ink pad from the ink pad case.
• After cleaning the wiper cleaner, make sure that 
the cleaner is not facing up.

Wiper cleaner

OK NG

Projection

• After cleaning the cap rubber, make sure that the 
cap slider is not misaligned.
If the cap slider is misaligned, move the slider 
block left and/or right to correct the alignment.

Cap rubber





5-8
Chapter 5  Maintenance
4
Open the left maintenance cover.
5
Remove the mist filter.
• Mist filters are located in two places.
• To remove the mist filter, pull the knob to the front
while pushing the  hook  in  the  direction indicated
by the arrow.
6
Clean the filter.
• Remove the filter, and remove the stain by holding
paper towel or the like.
• Wipe off any stain adhering to the filter case.
7
Set the mist filter at the original position.
8
Close the maintenance cover, and press 
the   key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
LOCAL.
Clean the NCU
Ink and dust adhere to NCU.
If  ink  or  dust  adheres,  normal  operation  may  not  be
possible.
1
Press the   (MENU)
 
and press the   key in local.
• Display maintenance menu.
2
Press     to select "Station 
Maintenance" and press the   key.
3
Press     to select "Carriage Out" 
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select "STATION 
MAINT." and press the   key.
• The carriage moves over the platen.
5
Open the front cover.
6
Include maintenance cleaning solution on 
clean stick (SPC-0421) and wipe off ink and 
dust adhered to NCU. 
7
Press the  key after the cleaning.
8
Close the front cover, and press the 
key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
step 1.
• If the stain strongly attached to the filter, such as 
the liquefaction of the ink attached to the filter, 
please replace the filter (SPC-0819).( P.5-19)

Maintenance cover
Maintenance cover

Hook
Knob
KnobHook

Carriage

NCU





5-9
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Washing the Head Nozzle
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
and press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "STATION",
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select “NOZZLE WASH”,
and press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
4
Clean the wiper and the bracket, and press 
the   key.
(1) Open the front cover then pull out it by 
holding projections at both ends of the wiper.
(2) Clean the wiper and bracket with a clean 
stick dipped in cleaning solution for 
maintenance.
Wipe off so that maintenance solution for 
maintenance will not remain.
(3) Insert it in the original position by holding the 
projections at both ends of the wiper.
5
Clean the cap rubber , and press the 
 key.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber with a
clean stick dipped in maintenance washing liquid
for maintenance.
• Wipe  off  so  that  maintenance  solution  for
maintenance will not remain.
• At  this  time,  the  discharge  passage  is  cleaned
automatically.
6
Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for 
maintenance.
• Suck cleaning  solution  into  a  dropper  and  fill up
the  cap  with  it.  Fill  up  the  cap  with  cleaning
solution on the verge of overflow from the cap.
7
Close the front cover, and press the 
 key.
8
Press the   key.
• The maintenance washing liquid filled in the cap is
absorbed.
• “Please Wait” will be displayed in the display until
the time you set has elapsed.
• It takes about one minute for NOZZLE WASH.
Cleaning of ink discharge passage
In order to  prevent  clogging  of ink  due  to coagulation of
ink  inside  the  ink  discharge  passage,  clean  the  ink
discharge passage periodically (once a week).
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "STATION", and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select "DISWAY WASH",
and press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.

Carriage

Projection

• When nozzle missing is not cleared even after this 
washing is carried out several times, contact our 
service desk or your local distributor for service.

Carriage





5-10
Chapter 5  Maintenance
4
Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for 
maintenance.
• Suck cleaning  solution  into a  dropper  and  fill  up
the  cap  with  it.  Fill  up  the  cap  with  cleaning
solution on the verge of overflow from the cap.
5
Press the   key.
• Perform the suction of the maintenance cleaning
solution and clean the ink discharge path.
When the Machine Is Not Used for a
Long Time
When the machine is not going to be used for a week or
more,  use  the  cleaning  function  for  storage  to  clean  the
head nozzles and ink discharge passage. Then, place the
machine in storage.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press  to select "STATION", and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select "STORAGE 
WASH", and press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
4
Clean the wiper and the bracket.
(1) Open the front cover then pull out it by 
holding projections at both ends of the wiper.
(2) Clean the wiper and bracket with a clean 
stick dipped in cleaning solution for 
maintenance.
Wipe off so that maintenance solution for 
maintenance will not remain.
(3) Insert it in the original position by holding the 
projections at both ends of the wiper.
5
and press the   key.
• Use the machine with always turning “ON” the 
main power. The function preventing nozzle clog-
ging operates automatically to protect the head of 
the nozzle.
• The head nozzle may result in nozzle clogging if 
the main power switch is left OFF for a long time.
Check the items on the right beforehand.
 Is [NEAR END] or [INK END] displayed?
• The cleaning solution or ink is absorbed when the nozzles 
are washed.
At this time, if the state of "no ink" or "almost no ink" is 
detected, the nozzle washing operation cannot start.
• In case of ink end etc., replace with a new bottle.
• When the warning message “Check waste ink” is 
indicated, check the waste ink tank, and operate it, 
referring to P.5-19 “If a Waste Ink Tank Confirma-
tion Message Appears” according to the situation.
• Until wiper/ bracket cleaning is competed, “COM-
PLETED” is displayed on the screen. After the 
work up to the step 3 is completed, press the 
[ENTER] key. If you press the [ENTER] key before 
cleaning is completed, the machine moves to the 
next washing procedure.
• Until wiper cleaning is competed, [COMPLETED 
(NEXT): ENT] is displayed on the screen. After the 
work up to the step 5 is completed, press the 
[ENTER] key. If you press the [ENTER] key before 
cleaning is completed, the machine moves to the 
next washing procedure.

Carriage

Projection





5-11
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
6
Clean the cap rubber.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber with a
clean stick dipped in maintenance washing liquid
for maintenance.
• Wipe  off  so  that  maintenance  solution  for
maintenance will not remain.
• At  this  time,  the  discharge  passage  is  cleaned
automatically.
7
Press the   key.
8
Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for 
maintenance.
• Suck maintenance solution into a dropper and fill
up  the  cap  with  it.  Fill  up  the  cap  with
maintenance  solution  on  the  verge  of  overflow
from the cap.
9
Press the   key.
• The nozzles are washed.
• When the nozzles have been completely washed,
cleaning is performed automatically, and the head
moves to the maintenance position.
10
Open the front cover.
11
Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for 
maintenance.
• Suck maintenance solution into a dropper and fill
up  the  cap  with  it.  Fill  up  the  cap  with
maintenance  solution  on  the  verge  of  overflow
from the cap.
12
Close the front cover, and press the 
 key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
step 2.
• Until washing liquid is filled, [COMPLETED 
NEXT [ENT]] is displayed on the screen. After 
the work up to the Step 8 is completed and you 
close the front cover, press the [ENTER] key.

Cap rubber





5-12
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Cleaning the Ink Head 
and the Area around It
Because  the  ink  head  employs  a  very  precise
mechanism,  due  care  needs  to  be  taken  when  it  is
cleaned.
Using a clean stick, etc., rub off gelatinous ink or dust that
may  stick  to  the  lower  part  of  the  slider  and  the  area
around the ink head. In doing so, never rub the nozzles of
the head.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press the   key twice to select the 
“CARRIAGE OUT”.
3
Press   to select "HEAD 
MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
• The  carriage  will  move  to  the  left  end  of  this
machine.
4
Open the maintenance cover.
5
Clean the bottom surface of the UV lamp.
• Wipe  off  the  ink  sticking  to  the  bottom
surface  of  the  UV  lamp  with  a  clean  stick
dipped  in  maintenance  washing  liquid  for
maintenance. Wipe off so that maintenance
solution for maintenance will not remain.
6
Use a clean stick soaked in maintenance 
cleaning fluid to wipe ink off the head 
surface or other surfaces.
• Never rub the nozzles.
7
Close the maintenance cover, and press 
the   key.
8
Press the   key several times to 
end the cleaning.
Tools required for cleaning
• Clean stick • Gloves
• Safety glasses
• Be sure to wear the attached safety glasses and 
gloves when cleaning the area around the ink 
head. Otherwise, you may get ink in your eyes.
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash your 
eyes thoroughly with a lot of clean water for at 
least 15 minutes. Then, consult a doctor as soon 
as possible.
• If the ink adheres to your skin, use a large amount 
of water and soap or special detergent for skin to 
remove the ink.

Maintenance cover
Maintenance cover

Clean the side surface of the head (shown in 
red) with a clean stick.
The nozzle part (Never 
touch it.)
Clean with a clean stick or a waste cloth.





5-13
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Nozzle Recovery Func-
tion
NOZZLE RECOVERY: When nozzles missing can not be
improved  at  specific  points,  other  good  nozzles  can  be
used as alternatives for printing.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
and press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "NOZZLE 
RECOVERY", and press the   key.
3
Press the   key twice.
• Printing of the nozzle pattern will start.
• Select  “ENTRY”  then  “Move  to  select  of  the
Nozzle line (Step 4) without drawing a pattern”.
4
Select the Nozzle line that needs NOZZLE 
RECOVERY by pressing  , and 
then press the   key.
5
Register the Nozzle number that needs 
NOZZLE RECOVERY, and press the 
 key.
(1) Select the registration number from 1 to 10 
by pressing [][] key and press the 
[ENTER] key.
(2) Register the nozzle number that needs 
recovery by pressing [][] key and press 
the [ENTER] key.
6
Press the   key several times to 
end the setting.
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310

Overhead view
H1-A H1-D H2-A H2-C
Nozzle line
H1-B H1-C H2-B H2-D
• For 6-color ink sets, the nozzle patterns “H1-B” 
and “H1-D” are not printed.  
• When using leaf media, set a media of more than 
A3 size put horizontally. If a media with narrow 
width is set, printing will only be conducted to mid-
way.
Nozzle pattern

SELECT ENTRY NOZZLE
H1-A
>
>
H1-B
>
H1-C
>
H1-D
>><<
>
****

Head No. 
(H1 to H2)
Nozzle 
line

• Up to 10 nozzles can be registered per 1 nozzle 
line.
• Even if you use this function, time required for 
drawing does not change.
• When you use white ink, print on the clear film to 
check.
Head1-A
No.1
No.2
16
128
No.3
184
No.4
OFF
No.5
OFF
>><<

Recovery nozzle No.  or OFF
Registration number :  1~10

1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230

Nozzle missing
No.184
Nozzle
number
Nozzle missing No.16
Nozzle
missing
No.128
Registration 
number
Recovery
Nozzle 
number
State
1 16 Target for nozzle recovery
2 128 Target for nozzle recovery
3 184 Target for nozzle recovery
4 OFF No registration
5 OFF No registration
Example of nozzle to be recovered





5-14
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Reset the set value
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press  to select "NOZZLE 
RECOVERY", and press the   key.
3
Press   to select "RESET", and 
press the   key.
4
Press   and 
 (<<) 
 
(>>) 
to select the Nozzle line that needs to be 
reset, and press the   key.
• A reset confirmation message will be displayed.
5
and press the   key.
6
Press the   key several times to 
end the setting.
Eliminate Ink Over 
Flow
1
Press 
 (MENU) 
in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select 
“MAINTENANCE”, and press the   
key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
3
Press 
 (<<).
4
Press   to select “OVER 
MAINTENANCE”, and press the   
key.
5
Press   to select a head.
6
Press the   key.
7
Press the   key several times 
to end the setting.
• If the problem is not eliminated after performing 
this operation once, repeat the operation.
If the problem is not eliminated after performing 
the operation three times, contact our service desk 
or your local distributor for service.





5-15
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Automatic Mainte-
nance Function
To  use  this  machine  comfortably,  you  can  set  various
maintenances to be performed automatically.
Here,  set  performing  intervals  of  various  automatic
maintenances.
You  can  prevent  troubles  such  as  ink  clogging  by
performing automatic maintenance periodically
(Auto maintenance function).
For  the  auto  maintenance  functions,  the  following  items
can be set:
Setting the Refreshing Intervals
The  interval  between  each  operation  of  ejecting  a  small
amount of ink from the nozzles to prevent nozzle clogging
is set.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "AUTO 
MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
3
Press   to select "REFRESH", and 
press the   key.
4
Press   to set the refreshing 
interval, and press the   key.
• Set value : The set value will differ according to
the ink type being used.
5
Press the   key several times to 
end the setting.
Setting  the  Cleaning  Intervals  and
Type
The cleaning type and the interval between each cleaning
operation are set.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "AUTO 
MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
3
Press   several times to select 
"Interval" or "Type", and press the 
 key.
4
Press   to select the setting item, 
and press the   key.
• Set value: The  set  value  will  differ
according to the ink type being
used.
• Set value of type: SOFT/ NORMAL/ HARD
5
Press the   key several times to 
end the setting.
• When you perform maintenance manually, after 
manual maintenance is completed and when time 
set with the automatic maintenance function has 
passed, maintenance starts automatically.
Function 
name
Descriptions
REFRESH
The interval between each refreshing 
operation is set.
CLEANING
(INTERVAL)
The interval between each cleaning operation 
is set.
CLEANING
(TYPE)
The cleaning type is set.
• If the “Check waste ink” warning message is dis-
played, the operation set in the auto maintenance 
function is not carried out. Perform the operations 
of P.5-19 if required.
• When the power switch on the front of the machine 
is turned off, check the waste ink tank.





5-16
Chapter 5  Maintenance
INK FILLING
Supplies ink to correct nozzle clogging.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "FILL UP INK", 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select the filling head, 
and press the   key.
4
Press the   key.
• Ink is supplied automatically.
5
Press the   key several times to 
end the setting.
AIR PURGE
For discharging ink and air that is in the head out of a port.
Use  this  function  if  ink  colors  become  mixed  inside  a
head, or if air causes a nozzle to clog.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
 key in LOCAL.
• Maintenance menu will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "AIR PURGE", 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select the head to air 
purge and check with  .
• Checked head is the target head to be air purged.
From  the  table  below,  select  the  head  with  the
color  (port)  to  be  purged.  (Head  1  only  for
UCJV150 Series)
• For UCJV300 Series, Head 1 and Head 2 can be
selected  at  the  same  time.  Select  both  Head  1
and Head 2 when the ink set is 4 colors.
4
Press the   key to move the 
selection head onto the wiper.
5
Open the front cover.
6
Open the lid on the front of the carriage.
• Remove the screws and slowly lower the lid.
7
Remove the cap of the target port.
• The layout of the port is as shown below.
• Turn  the  cap  about  30  °  counterclockwise  and
then remove it.
• The  removed  cap  has  ink  attached.  Temporarily
put on paper towels etc. so as not to contaminate
the surroundings.
• Air purge is done for each head.
• Do not remove the cap of Head 2 when removing
air of Head 1.
Tools required for cleaning
• Gloves • Safety glasses
• Paper towel
• Be sure to wear the attached safety glasses and 
gloves when cleaning the area around the ink 
head. Otherwise, you may get ink in your eyes.
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash your 
eyes thoroughly with a lot of clean water for at 
least 15 minutes. Then, consult a doctor as soon 
as possible.
• If the ink adheres to your skin, use a large amount 
of water and soap or special detergent for skin to 
remove the ink.
Ink set Head 1 Head 2
4 colors CMYKYKMC
6 colors+W C M Y K Lm Lc W W
4 colors+CL+W C M Y K CL CL W W
4 colors+W C C M M Y K W W
Head 1 Head 2
UCJV300 Series
4 colors:
CMYK YKMC
UCJV300 Series
6 colors + W
CMYK LmLcWW
UCJV300 Series
4 colors + CL + W:
CMYK CLCLWW
UCJV300 Series
4 colors + W:
CCMM YKWW
UCJV150 Series
4 colors:CMYK
Ink set Head 1 Head 2

ScrewLid

CY
MK

YM
KC

CY
MK

Lm W
Lc W

CY
MK

CL W
CL W

C M
CM

YW
KW

CY
MK





5-17
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
8
Connect the jig to the port.
• Lift the lid on the front of the carriage and pull out
the jig.
• As with the cap,  push  the  end of  the jig  into the
port and rotate it clockwise by 30 °.
9
Press the 
 key
 to start air purge
.
10
Check inside the transparent tube of the jig 
whether ink is being discharged.
• Be  sure  to  discharge  until  the  amount  of  ink
discharged is constant and there is no air mixing.
After confirming the discharge, please remove the
jig and press the   key to finish.
• After  30  second  elapse,  ink  discharge  is
automatically stopped.
If ink is not ejected properly, please "retry".
• While ejecting ink, press the   to eject ink
vigorously for 3 seconds.
11
If there are other target ports on the 
working head, discharge the ink 
continuously.
• Connect jigs and discharge ink as well.
• After purging all target ports of the working head,
select "Finish".
12
Remove the jig on the "Remove the air 
purge jig" screen, close the lid of the 
carriage and close the front cover.
13
Press the   key to move the 
carriage to the cap position.
• If  only  one  head  is  selected,  cleaning  is
automatically performed and it ends.
• If  more  than  one  head  is  selected,  Head  2  is
automatically moved to the wiper position.
Purge the target port as in Head 1
• Even if the cap is removed, the ink does not over-
flow by the internal mechanism.
• Lift the tube to let the ink inside. If ink remains in 
the tube, it may cure.
• If the retry operation is performed continuously 
while the jig is connected to one port, air may be 
mixed into the head, which may cause nozzle 
missing.  Terminate the air purge when the ink is 
normally discharged.

Cap

Lid
Jig





5-18
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Replacing consum-
ables
Replacing the wiper
Wiper (part number: SPA - 0271) is consumables.
When  the  display  indicates  the  warning  message
“Replace a WIPER”, it is necessary to check and replace
the wiper with a new one.
Also, wipe ink sticking to the lower surface of the slider off.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "STATION", and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select "WIPER 
EXCHANGE", and press the   key.
• The number  of  times  the  wiper was  used  will be
reset.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
4
Remove the wiper.
• Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its
both ends.
5
Insert a new wiper.
• Insert the  wiper by  holding the  protrusions at  its
both ends.
6
Press the   key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
LOCAL.
Replacing the mist filter
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press the   key twice to select the 
“CARRIAGE OUT”.
3
Press   to select "HEAD 
MAINTENANCE", and press the   
key.
• The  carriage  will  move  to  the  left  end  of  this
machine.
4
Open the left maintenance cover.
• The cleaning wiper is sold separately. Buy one 
through the dealer in your region or at our service 
office.

Carriage

Projection

Projection

Maintenance cover
Maintenance cover





5-19
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
5
Remove the mist filter.
• Mist filters are located in two places.
• To remove the mist filter, pull the knob to the front
while pushing the  hook  in  the  direction indicated
by the arrow.
6
Replace with a new filter (SPC-0819).
7
Insert the mist filter.
8
Close the maintenance cover, and press 
the   key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
LOCAL.
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation 
Message Appears
Ink that is used for head cleaning is collected in the waste
ink  tank  on  the  bottom  right  side  of  this  machine.  This
machine  keeps  track  of  the  total  volume  of  ink  that  is
discharged, and displays a confirmation message when a
certain  volume  is  reached.  (When  this  message  is
displayed, consider the replacement of the waste ink
tank.)
Confirmation Message in LOCAL
1
The warning message "Check waste 
ink"appears on the display.
2
Check the state of the waste ink tank.
• If  the  actual  volume  is  not  displayed  correctly,
perform the operation in Step 3.
• If the actual volume is displayed correctly, replace
the waste ink tank.
When you replace (dispose of) the waste tank ink,
perform the procedure in "Replace the waste ink
tank with another". ( P.5-19)
3
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
4
Press   to select "INK TANK 
EXCHANGE", and press the   key.
5
If the waste ink amount needs to be 
adjusted, press   to adjust the 
level, and then press the   key.
Replace the waste ink tank with 
another
If the waste ink tank becomes full, use the following
procedure to replace the waste ink tank with another, and
set the waste ink information in the maintenance menu to
0%.
If you replace the waste ink tank before the waste ink tank
confirmation message is displayed (before the 2L tank is
80%  (1.6L)  full,  use  the  same  procedure  to  replace  the
waste ink tank.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed.
2
Press   to select "INK TANK 
EXCHANGE", and press the   key.
• Waste ink tank information is displayed.
3
Press   to adjust the level, and 
press the   key.
• The waste ink tank amount that is managed in this
machine will be reset.
4
Open the waste ink tank cover.
5
Pull it frontward to remove by holding the 
waste ink tank handle.
• The message is displayed when it reaches 80% 
(1.6L) of the 2L tank.

Hook
Knob
KnobHook

Waste ink 
tank





5-20
Chapter 5  Maintenance
6
Replace the waste ink tank.
(1) Prepare a new waste ink tank (SPC-0117) or
discard  waste  ink  from  current  waste  ink
tank.
(2) Insert the waste ink tank by holding a handle 
of the tank.
7
Close the waste ink tank cover.
8
Press the   key.
• The ink discharging amount that is  controlled by
the  machine  is  reset  and  the  message  is
canceled.
Replacing the waste ink tank before the waste
ink tank confirmation message is displayed
If you replace the waste ink tank before the waste ink tank
confirmation  message is displayed (before  the 2.0L  tank
is 80% (1.6L) full, use the same procedure in the previous
section.
1
Perform steps 3 through 8 in "Replace the 
waste ink tank with another" ( P.5-19) 
to empty the waste ink tank.
Replacing the Cutter Blade
The  media  cutter  blade  is  consumable.  When  the  cutter
blade gets dull, replace it with a new one (SPA-0107).
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 and 
press the   key.
• Cutting menu is displayed.
2
Press   to select “TOOL 
CHANGE”, and then press the   
key.
• The cutter unit moves.
• Put a cap on the waste 
ink tank removed.
• Waste ink is equivalent to waste oil of industrial 
waste. Request an industrial waste disposal com-
pany for disposal of waste ink.

Cap

Empty waste ink tank

• The blade is sharp. Be careful not to hurt yourself 
or anyone else.
• Store the cutter blade in a place that is out of the 
reach of children. In addition, dispose of used cut-
ter blades according to regional laws and regula-
tions.
• When replacing the cutter blade, it is recom-
mended to place a sheet of paper under the cutter 
blade. This will help pick up the cutter blade if it 
drops.

Cutter Unit





5-21
5
2
Chapter 5  Maintenance
3
Replace the cutter unit by the carriage.
• Now the cutter unit can be moved manually. Move
the  cutter  unit  to  the  position  where  you  can
assure easy access, and replace the blade edge.
(1) Loosen the screw of the cutter unit.
(2) Remove the cutter unit.
(3) Mount a new cutter unit.
(4) Fasten the screw of the cutter unit to secure 
the cutter unit.
4
When replacement is finished, press the 
 key.
5
Press the   key several times.
Replacing and Adjust-
ing the Cutter Blade
Replacing the cutter
The cutter is consumable. If the cutter is chipped or blunt,
replace it with a new one. (Accessory parts number: SPA-
0030)
New cutter (low-pressure blade set for PVC sheets: Model
SPB-0030) are available from your distributor or MIMAKI's
sales office.
1
Remove the cap located at the edge by 
rotating it.
2
Replace the cutter with a new one using 
tweezers or the like.

Screw
Cutter Unit

• Do not touch the cutter with your fingers.
The sharp cutter tip may injure you.
• Do not shake the tool after having set the cutter.
Otherwise, the blade edge may pop out, causing 
you to get injured.
• Keep the cutter out of reach of children.
Dispose of the used cutter blade in compliance 
with the applicable regulations.
Name of product
Product 
No.
Specifi
cation
Remarks
Decentering blade for 
vinyl sheet 
SPB-0001
Three 
blades
Decentering blade for 
small letters
SPB-0003
Three 
blades
Decentering blade for 
rubber sheet
SPB-0005
Three 
blades
Decentering blade for 
reflecting sheet
SPB-0006
Two 
blades
Decentering blade for 
fluorescent sheet
SPB-0007
Three 
blades
Replacing the cutter other 
than supplied one
SPB-0030
Three 
blades
supplied one
Decentering blade for 
thick rubber sheet
SPB-0084
Three 
blades

Cutter holder
Cutter
Cap





5-22
Chapter 5  Maintenance
Adjusting the Cutter Blade
After adjusting  the  blade edge, set the  cut condition and
perform  test  cut  to  check  whether  cutting  is  performed
well.
1
Turn the adjusting knob to adjust the 
protruding amount of the cutter.
• Turn  the  knob  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow  to
extend the cutter blade.
( 0.5 mm per revolution)
Replacing cutters other than sup-
plied one
1
Loosen the lock nut, and pull the adjusting 
knob out of the holder.
2
Insert the cutter into the adjusting knob.
• Use tweezers to insert the cutter into the adjusting
knob.
3
Tighten the lock nut.
Adjusting blade edge of cutters other
than supplied one
1
Loosen the lock nut.
2
Turn the adjusting knob to adjust the 
protruding amount of the cutter blade.
3
Tighten the lock nut so that the adjusting 
knob will not turn.

Cutter
Adjusting knob

Lock nut
Adjusting knob

• The blade adjuster (Product No.: OPT-S1005) will 
facilitate the adjustment of the protruding amount 
of the blade.

Lock nut

Adjusting knob





This chapter
describes the corrective measures to be taken for a phenomenon suspected to be 
trouble and the procedures to clear the error number displayed on the LCD.
Troubleshooting ...............................................................................6-2
Power does not turn on  ...................................................................6-2
The machine does not start printing  ................................................6-2
Media get jammed / media is soiled  ................................................6-2
Image quality is poor  .......................................................................6-3
Nozzle is clogged  ............................................................................6-3
An error occurred in the ink bottle  ...................................................6-3
When the ink leakage occurs  ..........................................................6-3
Warning / Error Messages ...............................................................6-4
Warning messages ..........................................................................6-4
Error messages  ...............................................................................6-7
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-2
Troubleshooting
Trouble?  Take  appropriate  actions  as  described  below  before  taking  the  trouble  as  a  failure.  If  still  the  problem  is  not
solved after troubleshooting, contact your local distributor or our service desk.
Power does not turn on
In most cases, this is due to improper connection of the power cable for the machine or computer. Check that the power
cable is connected properly.
The machine does not start printing
This occurs when the data is not being transmitted to the machine properly.
It can also occur when the printing function does not work properly or the media is not set correctly.
Media get jammed / media is soiled
Media jamming or stained media is considered to be due to the use of an unsuitable media or improper setting of media.
Has the power cable been connected 
between the machine and a power plug 
socket ?
Securely connect the power cable.
Is the main switch ON ?
Turn on the main switch. ( P.2-3)
Is the power switch located on the front of 
machine "ON" ?
Turn on the power switch on the front of the machine. 
(P.2-3)
Is the correct interface cable used ?
Use the cable exclusive for the machine.
Is the interface cable properly connected ?
Securely connect the interface cable.
Yes
Is the message on the display indicating that 
ink has run out ?
Replace the ink bottle with a new one.
Is a recommended media used ?
Use recommended media.
Is the media not curled or bent ends ?
Avoid using any media with curls or bent ends.
Yes
Is the media hanging down along the platen 
?
Use a take-up unit or Re-load the media on the machine. 
P.2-12P.2-4
No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-3
1
2
2
2
2
6
Image quality is poor
This section describes  the corrective actions to be taken in case the image quality is not satisfactory. Take remedy for
particular problems with image quality. If the remedy does not work, contact your local distributor or our service desk.
Nozzle is clogged
When  nozzle  clogging  is  not  dissolved  even  after  the  head  cleaning  referring  to  P.2-19,  make  sure  the  following
operations.
 Wash the head nozzle by the operations of P.5-9.
 Follow the procedures described in P.5-16 to perform the FILL UP INK operation.
 Follow the procedures described in P.5-16 to perform the AIR PURGE operation.
 Recover the nozzle by the operations of P.5-13.
An error occurred in the ink bottle
If an ink bottle fails, a warning message will be displayed.
None of printing, cleaning and all the other operations that use ink is available.
When abnormality occurs, please take following actions.
• Check the amount of ink in the ink bottle and replenish it if the ink volume is low.
When the ink leakage occurs
In case of ink leakage, please turn off the main power, unplug the power cable and contact our service office or distributor.
Phenomenon Measures
White lines / blur / dark stripes
(in the direction of travel of the heads)
(1) Execute the head cleaning. P.2-19
(2) Perform maintenance of the inside of the station. P.5-6
(3) Execute the [FEED COMP.] function.  P.3-8
(4) If any pieces of paper or dust is attached on the path of the heads such as
media press, remove it.
Characters are double- or triple-printed in 
the media feed direction
(1) Execute the [FEED COMP.] function.  P.3-5
Disagreement in print positions in bi-
directional print. 
(1) Execute the [DROP POSITION] function.  P.3-6
Ink drops falling on media during printing
(1) Clean the wiper.  P.5-6
(2) Clean the ink cap.  P.5-6
(3) Clean around the head. P.5-12
(4) Execute the head cleaning [NORMAL]. P.2-19
(5) Set the INTERVAL WIPING, operation. P.3-10
• Please do not leave it for a long time with the ink bottle error displayed. Nozzle clogging prevention function will not oper-
ate.
If nozzles are clogged, the machine must be repaired by MIMAKI's service engineer.




Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-4
Warning / Error Messages
If some trouble occurs, the buzzer sounds and the display shows a corresponding error message.
Take an appropriate remedy for the displayed error.
Warning messages
Errors when performing operations
Message displayed in LOCAL
Message Cause Measures
Operation cannot be performed because
no media is detected.
• Execute after media is detected.
The  motor  is  OFF  after  the  cover  was
opened etc.
• Return to LOCAL and execute the operation
after completion of initialization.
An ink error occurred.
• Execute the operation after replacing with a
new ink bottle.
The  front  cover  or  the  maintenance
cover is opened.
• Execute  the  operation  after  closing  the
cover.
Data was received.
• Execute  the  operation  after  executing  data
clear.
Message Cause Measures
The waste ink tank count has exceeded
the prescribed amount.
• Check the amount of waste ink in the waste
ink tank.
• Conduct  maintenance  and  waste  ink  tank
replacement, and reset the amount of waste
ink.
The  used  count  of  wiper  has  exceeded
the prescribed number.
• Execute  maintenance,  station  maintenance
and wiper exchange and replace the wiper.
No media is set. Or, the sensor is faulty.
• Set the media.
If the same error message still appears after
setting  the  media,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Print data is received in LOCAL.
• Shift to REMOTE and execute printing.
Or, execute data clear and cancel printing.
Temperature in the installed environment
(machine) is too high.
Stable printing cannot be done.
• Adjust the ambient temperature to within the
specified scope (20 ℃ to 35 ℃ ).
Temperature in the installed environment
(machine) is too low.
Stable printing cannot be done.
The NCU unit is not connected.
The  nozzle  check  function  cannot  be
used.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
INVALID OPERATION
MEDIA UNDETECT

INVALID OPERATION
MOTOR POWER OFF

INVALID OPERATION
INK ERROR

INVALID OPERATION
COVER OPEN

INVALID OPERATION
DATA REMAIN

Check waste ink

Replace WIPER

NO MEDIA

DATA REMAIN

MACHINE TEMP./H **°C

MACHINE TEMP./L **°C

NCU CONNECT





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-5
1
2
2
2
2
6
The NCU sensor sensitivity is too low to
correctly judge nozzle missing.
The  nozzle  check  function  cannot  be
used.
• NCU replacement is necessary.
• Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local  dis-
tributor to call for service.
• Check the state of the nozzles, and if there
are frequent nozzle missing and ink droplet
misalignment, conduct cleaning to restore.
Because an NCU-related error occurred
during  nozzle  check,  printing  was
stopped  and  the  nozzle  check  function
was turned OFF.
• Check the state of the nozzles, and if there
are frequent nozzle missing and ink droplet
misalignment, conduct cleaning to restore.
• If the same error message still appears after
restoring  the  state  of  the  nozzles,  contact
your  local  distributor,  our  sales  office,  or
service center. 
The NCU ink pad is full.
• It is necessary to replace the NCU ink pad.
Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local  dis-
tributor to call for service.
The NCU sensor sensitivity is falling.
• Replacement of the NCU is recommended.
Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local  dis-
tributor to call for service.
The sensitivity of the sensor can not be
adjusted.
The sensitivity of the sensor can not be
adjusted.
Because the nozzle check found nozzles
missing, printing was stopped.
• Perform  head  cleaning  (P.2-19)  and
deal with the nozzles clogging  (P.3-23).
Because  an  NCU-related  error  occurred
during  nozzle  check,  printing  was
stopped  and  the  nozzle  check  function
was turned OFF.
• Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local  dis-
tributor to call for service.
Message Cause Measures
REPLACE NCU

NCU NZK CHK (HW)
Nozzle check OFF

NCU NZK CHK (MARK)
Nozzle check OFF

NCU CENTER POS
Nozzle check OFF

NCU FLUSH POS
Nozzle check OFF

NCU SN ADJST
Nozzle check OFF

REPLACE NCU INK PAD

NCU SENSOR LEVEL LOW

NCU Sens Adj Err H

NCU Sens Adj Err L

Nozzle Missing
Print Stopped

NCU ERROR
Nozzle check OFF





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-6
Ink Error
Ink error is displayed also in the local guidance. ( P.3-27)
Message Cause Measures
• The ink cartridge IC chip cannot be cor-
rectly read.
• An error occurred in the information of
the ink IC chip.
• Make  sure  there  is  no  nozzle  clogging.
(especially for the white ink)
• Make  sure  that  the  cartridge  is  correctly
inserted.
• Reinsert the cartridge.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
The ink type of loaded ink IC chip is dif-
ferent from the ink type to be loaded.
• Set the ink IC chip of correct ink type.
The ink color of loaded ink IC chip is dif-
ferent from the ink color to be loaded.
• Set the ink IC chip of correct ink color.
No ink IC chip (ink bottle not loaded).
• Set an ink IC chip.
• Make  sure  that  the  ink  IC  chip  is  correctly
inserted.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Ink end (no ink). • Replace the ink with a new one.
INK NEAR END (remains slight ink).
• The  ink  will  soon  be  used  up.  See  pages
through.
The  specified  expiration  date  of  an  ink
cartridge has passed. (Available)
• Be  careful  as  the  expiration  date  of  ink  is
coming soon, please use as soon as possi-
ble. Can be used till the next month.
The  specified  expiration  date  of  an  ink
cartridge has passed.
(one month has  passed after the  speci-
fied expiration date/available)
• Be  careful  as  the  expiration  date  of  ink  is
coming soon, please use as soon as possi-
ble. Can be used till the next month.
The  specified  expiration  date  of  an  ink
cartridge has passed.
(two  month  has  passed  after  the speci-
fied expiration date/available)
• Replace the ink with a new one.
WRONG INK IC

INK TYPE

INK COLOR

NON INK IC

Ink end

Ink near-end

Expiration

Expiration:1MONTH

Expiration:2MONTH





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-7
1
2
2
2
2
6
Error messages
When an error message is displayed, eliminate the error according to the chart below.
When displaying again, contact your local distributor or our service desk to call for service.
Message Cause Measures
An error  occurred  in the head tempera-
ture control.
• Turn off the power to the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Print head connection error
Print head failure
An error occurred in the main PCB .
An error occurred in the head control.
Detected the battery life end of the main
PCB.
An error occurred in the head control.
An error occurred in the head control.
An error occurred in the log control.
An  error  occurred  in  the  power  supply
system of the main PCB.
An error occurred in the power supply of
the main PCB.
ERROR 108
HD THERMIS [1234]

ERROR 108
HD CONNECT [1234]

ERROR 108
ERROR 108
HD MEM EMP [1234 ]

ERROR 108
HD TYPE [1234]

ERROR 122
CHECK:SDRAM

ERROR 128
HDC FIFO OVER

ERROR 128
HDC FIFO UNDER

ERROR 129
BATTERY EXCHANGE

ERROR 12a
HDC SPEED

ERROR 130
HD DATA SEQ

ERROR 148
E-LOG SEQ

ERROR 151
Main PCB V1R2

ERROR 152
Main PCB V2R5

ERROR 153
Main PCB V3R3

ERROR 154
Main PCB V05

ERROR 155
Main PCB V36-1

ERROR 157
Main PCB VTT

ERROR 158
Main PCB V36-2

ERROR 16e
Main PCB V3R3B





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-8
An error occurred in the power supply of
the main PCB.
• Turn off the power to the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
COM driver becomes the high tempera-
ture.
New Print Head was recognized.
An error occurred in the power supply of
the main PCB.
An error occurred in the head control.
UVLED PCB not connected.
An  abnormality  occurred  in  the  power
supply of Station 4 PCB.
Memory size is insufficient.
The  machine received  some  data  other
than print data. Or, an  error  occurred  in
the transmitted print data.
• Execute data clear and transmit data again.
• Turn  the  power  on  again  and  transmit  the
data.
• Check the USB cable connection.
• Use  an  interface  cable  conforming  to  the
specifications.
An error occurred in the transmitted print
data.
The  machine  received  some  data
unprintable condition.
• Check the print data output condition of the
RIP software.
• Check the profile.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
An error occurred in the communication
of USB.
• Check the USB cable connection.
• Connect the USB cable again.
• Turn  the  power  on  again  and  transmit  the
data.
• Use  an  interface  cable  conforming  to  the
specifications.
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 18a
Main PCB V_CORE

ERROR 18c
Main PCB V12

ERROR 15f
HEAD DRIVE HOT

ERROR 171
NEW HEAD CONNECT

ERROR 18a
Main PCB V_CORE

ERROR 18b
Main PCB V1R5B

ERROR 18c
Main PCB V12

ERROR 18e
FLS NOT COMP

ERROR 18f
OFSET START

ERROR 18f
OFSET END

ERROR 19f
LED Connection Error

ERROR 1dc
Station4 PCB V24

ERROR 1dd
Station4 PCB V24-A

ERROR 1e6
PRAM SIZE SHORTAGE

ERROR 201
COMMAND ERROR

ERROR 202
PARAMETER ERROR

ERROR 206
PRINTING MODE

ERROR 304
USB INIT ERR

ERROR 305
USB TIME OUT





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-9
1
2
2
2
2
6
An  error  occurred  while  accessing  the
printing condition data.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
An excessive load was applied to the X
motor.
• Make  sure  that  the  media  is  set  correctly.
(Feed without problems?)
• Open the cover and check whether there is
any  obstacle  in  the  movement  of  the  car-
riage.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
An error  due  to  an excessive  current  of
the X motor was detected.
An excessive load was applied to the Y
motor.
An error  due  to  an excessive  current  of
the Y motor was detected.
UV unit fan does not work
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Error on the roller sensor of take-up unit
The  roller  sensor  cannot  be  correctly
read.
• Make sure  that the  setting  of [Machine set-
ting]  ->  [feeding  /  take-up  unit]  ->  [take-up
unit] is "ON".
• Check the set state of the media.
• Confirm that the take-up unit operates using
the manual SW.
Could not separate the print head.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Could not connect to the print head.
Could not separate the cutter head.
Could not connect to the cutter head.
Inappropriate pinch roller position.
• Position the pinch roller on the grit roller.
When  displaying  again  again,  contact  your
local distributor or our service desk to call for
service.
An error occurred in the control position.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
An error occurred in the Y origin detection
(initialization operation).
Error occurred in the linear scale.
The  media  width  could  not  be  correctly
read.
• Check the media set position.
• Clean the media sensor.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
The media is set outside the proper area.
Raise the clamp lever.
• Check the clamp lever is lowered.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 307
MCFD File IF Error

ERROR 401
MOTOR X

ERROR 403
X CURRENT

ERROR 402
MOTOR Y

ERROR 404
Y CURRENT

ERROR 44e
UV UNIT FAN ERROR

ERROR 44 f
Take-UP Roll Sns Err

ERROR 45a
P-HEAD TAKE OFF Err

ERROR 45b
C-HEAD CONNECT Err

ERROR 45c
C-HEAD TAKE OFF Err

ERROR 45d
P-HEAD CONNECT Err

ERROR 45e
CHECK PR/GR POSITION

ERROR 509
HDC POSCNT

ERROR 50a
Y ORIGIN 

ERROR 50f
L-SCALE BLACK

ERROR 50c
MEDIA WIDTH SENSOR

ERROR 516
MEDIA SET POSITION R

ERROR 504
CLAMP UP





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-10
MEDIA JAM SENSOR reacted.
• Remove the contacted media and reset it.
• Open the cover and check whether there is
any  obstacle  in  the  movement  of  the  car-
riage.
Automatic  recognition  of  negative  pres-
sure sensor failed.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Cutter head could not be  moved  due to
connection  failure  between  the  cutter
head and the connecting unit.
The  internal  circuit  of  the  ionizer  was
broken or abnormal discharge occurred.
Due  to  contamination  and  abrasion  of
the electrode needle, the ion generation
amount is reduced.
• Clean the electrode needle by looking at the
ionizer instruction manual.
• If the symptoms do not improve, replace the
corresponding static electrode needle.
When  ions  are  absorbed  by  the  sur-
rounding  metal,  the  static  elimination
capability  is  affected  by  instability  of
installation  environment  (temperature,
humidity, surrounding metals, etc.).
• Make sure there are no conductors or other
static eliminator near the ionizer.
• Keep away from conductors and static elimi-
nators if they are nearby.
Pump sensor detection error.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
The linear scale wiring to the DIO PCB is
disconnected.
The IC chip cannot be correctly read.
• Make  sure  that  the  IC  chip  is  correctly
inserted.
• Reinsert the bottle.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while. 
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
The float sensor of the subtank detected
Limit.
• Perform  "Maintenance"  "Overflow  Mainte-
nance".
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Failed to supply ink to the sub tank
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
It  became  impossible  to  maintain  the
negative  pressure  within  the  proper
range (plus side)
It  became  impossible  to  maintain  the
negative  pressure  within  the  proper
range (minus side)
It  became  impossible  to  maintain  the
positive pressure within the proper range
(plus side)
IC  chip  can  not  be  read  for  a  certain
time.
• Make  sure  that  the  bottle  is  correctly
inserted.
• Reinsert the bottle.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while. 
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 505
MEDIA JAM

ERROR 519
NEGATIVE P.SENSOR

ERROR 522
CUT HOME POSITION

ERROR 525
WRONG IONIZER

ERROR 526
IONIZER ION LEVEL

ERROR 527
IONIZER CONDITION

ERROR 528
PUMP MOTOR SENSOR

ERROR 549
LEnc. Count DIO

ERROR 608
WRONG INK IC

ERROR 61A
InkOverflow

ERROR 61B
SUPPLY INK

ERROR 61D
NEGATIVE  P. NotEnough,

ERROR 61E
NEGATIVE  P. OVER,

ERROR 620
POSITIVE P.NotEnough,

ERROR 621
POSITIVE P.OVER,

ERROR 627
ERROR627 INK BOTTLE SET





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-11
1
2
2
2
2
6
The NCU unit is not connected. The noz-
zle check function cannot be used.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
The NCU sensor sensitivity is too low to
correctly judge nozzle missing. The noz-
zle check function cannot be used.
• NCU replacement is necessary.
Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local  dis-
tributor to call for service.
The NCU cannot correctly recognize the
ink  discharge,  because  there  are  fre-
quent  nozzle  missing  and  ink  droplet
misalignment.
• Check the state of the nozzles, and if there
are frequent nozzle missing and ink droplet
misalignment, conduct cleaning to restore.
Adjustment  of  the  discharge  position  to
the NCU has failed.
Sensor sensitivity adjustment has failed.
• Check the state of the nozzles, and if there
are frequent nozzle missing and ink droplet
misalignment, conduct cleaning to restore.
If the same error message still appears after
restoring  the  state  of  the  nozzles,  contact
your  local  distributor,  our  sales  office,  or
service center. 
The NCU sensor sensitivity is falling.
•  Replacement of the NCU is recommended.
Contact  your  local  distributor,  our  sales
office, or service center. 
The sensitivity of the sensor can not be
adjusted.
Ink heater thermistor broke down.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
UV-DRV PCB fuse blown.
Due to a certain error, the function can-
not be performed.
• Execute  the  operation  after  closing  the
cover.
• Execute after media is detected.
• Execute after solving the ink error.
Performed an operation that can not be
executed while receiving print data.
• Execute after clearing the data.
An error occurred in the mounted heads.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 650
NCU CONECT

ERROR 651
REPLACE NCU

ERROR 652
NCU NZK CHK (HW)

ERROR 653
NCU NZK CHK (MARK)

ERROR 654
NCU CENTER POS

ERROR 655
NCU FLUSH POS

ERROR 656
NCU SN ADJST

ERROR 658
NCU SENSOR LV LOW

ERROR 65b
NCU Sens Adj Err H

ERROR 65c
NCU Sens Adj Err L

ERROR 715
InkHeater Thr

ERROR 716
InkHeater Tmp

ERROR 717
InkHeater Brk

ERROR 71a
UV-DRV PCB fuse 

ERROR 901
INVALID OPERATION

ERROR 902
DATA REMAIN

ERROR 90d
NO HEAD SELECT





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-12
Insufficient  print  area  in  built-in  pattern
printing.
• Change  the  media  to  the  one  with  enough
width or length.
When the media width narrows because the
origin moved, slide the origin  to the right to
widen the effective media width.
An error occurred in the main PCB.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Received the  code other  than the  com-
mand date.
• Execute data clear and transmit data again.
• Turn  the  power  on  again  and  transmit  the
data.
• Check the USB cable connection.
• Use  an  interface  cable  conforming  to  the
specifications.
Received  the  parameters  outside  the
value range.
Received the invalid device control com-
mand.
You have performed "Copy", but the data
is not stored in the reception buffer.
• Execute Copy function using the same data
one more time.
The  received  data  is  too  big  to  multiple
sheet cutting.
• Please change the data size.
The feeding direction of the sheet is too
short.
• Use a longer sheet.
Could not detect the register marks.
(1) Check whether the register marks are placed
appropriately. (P.4-2)
(2) Make sure that the media is not curled.
(3) Make sure that the position to start detecting
the register marks is correct.
(4) Make  sure  that  black  register  marks  are
printed on a white base.
(5) Make sure that  there  are  no  printed  images
or smudges between register marks and that
there is no dust adhered.
(6) Make  sure  that  the  register  mark  detection
settings are correct.
(7) If the register marks still cannot be detected,
even  after  clearing  the  check  items  above,
contact your local distributor, our sales office,
or service center. 
(8) If  the  area  around  register  marks  are
colored,  set  the  “MARK  FILL  UP”  of  the
register mark detection settings to ON.
The register mark detection result shows
that the origin position was detected out-
side the print range.
• Place the register marks within the sheet.
Could not detect the pen height.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
The pen height is not correct.
(1) Make  sure  that  the  pen  line  rubber  is  not
worn out extremely, or it has not come off or
changed form.
(2) Make  sure  that  there  is  nothing  adhered  to
the pen line rubber.
(3) After  putting  the  pen  in  the  commercially
available pen holder, check that it is installed
at the correct position.
(4) If an error is still displayed even after clearing
the  check  items  above,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 90f
PRINT AREA SHORT

ERROR 04
PARAM ROM

ERROR C10
COMMAND

ERROR C11
       PARAMETER    

ERROR C12
       DEVICE 

ERROR C31
       NO DATA

ERROR C32
            DATAtooBIG

ERROR C33
      SHEET SIZE

ERROR C36
      MARKdetect 

ERROR C37
      MARK ORG

ERROR C60
      PenEncoder

ERROR C61
      Pen Stroke 





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-13
1
2
2
2
2
6
SYSTEM HALT
Power  supply  voltage  error  on  CTC
PCB.
• Turn off the power on the machine and turn it
on after a while.
When  displaying  again,  contact  your  local
distributor, our sales office, or service center. 
Power  supply  voltage  error  on  UV-DRV
PCB.
An error occurred in the power supply of
the STATION IV PCB.
Message Measures
• Turn off the power to the machine and turn it on after a while.
When displaying again again, check the number and contact your local distributor, our
sales office, or service center. (“000” is the error No.)
• Perform cleaning around the wiper.
• Turn off the power to the machine and turn it on after a while.
When displaying again again, check the number and contact your local distributor, our
sales office, or service center.
Message Cause Measures
ERROR B0A
CTC PCB Vpow

ERROR B0B
CTC PCB V24

ERROR B0C
CTC PCB V5R0

ERROR B0D
CTC PCB V3R3

ERROR B0E
CTC PCB V2R5

ERROR B0F
DIO PCB Uvpow

ERROR B19
Station4 PCB V36

SYSTEM HALT (*)
000 : 
MESSAGE

SYSTEM HALT (*)
406 : WIPER ORG





Chapter 6  Troubleshooting
6-14




This chapter
contains the lists of the specifications and functions of this machine.
Specification  ....................................................................................7-2
Printer Section Specifications ..........................................................7-2
Cutter Section Specifications ...........................................................7-3
Common Specifications ...................................................................7-4
Ink specifications  .............................................................................7-6
Ink bottle installation order ...............................................................7-7
Sheet for inquiry  ..............................................................................7-8
Chapter 7
Appendix





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-2
Specification
Printer Section Specifications
UCJV300 Series
UCJV150 Series
Item UCJV300-160 UCJV300-130 UCJV300-107 UCJV300-75
Print head
Method Drop-on-demand piezoelectric print heads
Specification 2 heads, 8 nozzles: 4c/6c+WW (in-line)
Printing mode (scan x feed)
300x600dpi
*1
 / 300x900dpi / 600x600dpi / 600x1200dpi / 1200x1200dpi
*1. Depending on the ink type, it may not be installed.
Plotting resolution
x-dpi: 600, 900, 1200
y-dpi: 300, 600, 1200
Usable inks
UV curing ink (genuine Mimaki ink)
C, M, Y, K, Lc, Lm, W, CL
Ink supply Supplied from bottles (UV curing ink)
Ink capacity 1L (1 bottle for each color)
Usable media
Label stock (paper-based) / PVC sheet (including laminated; thickness no more than 
0.25 mm) / Fluorescent sheet / Reflective sheet
Margin
Leaf media
Left end and right end : 15 mm (Default) / Min. 5 mm   Front : 120 mm   Rear : 150 mm 
(Left end and right end : 0.6 in (Default) / Min. 0.2 in   Front : 4.7 in   Rear : 5.9 in)
Roll media
Left end and right end : 15 mm (Default) / Min. 5 mm   Front : 120 mm   Rear : 150 mm 
(Left end and right end : 0.6 in (Default) / Min. 0.2 in   Front : 4.7 in   Rear : 5.9 in)
Head height adjustment Manual 3-stage (2.0/2.5/3.0) 
Waste ink tank Bottle type (2,000 cc)
Command MRL- V
UV unit Two air-cooled LED UV irradiation units (mounted on the head slider)
Item UCJV150-160
Print head
Method Drop-on-demand piezoelectric print heads
Specification 1 heads, 4 nozzles: 4c
Printing mode (scan x feed)
300x600dpi
*1
 / 300x900dpi / 600x600dpi / 600x1200dpi / 1200x1200dpi
*1. Depending on the ink type, it may not be installed.
Plotting resolution
x-dpi: 600, 900, 1200
y-dpi: 300, 600, 1200
Usable inks
UV curing ink (genuine Mimaki ink)
C, M, Y, K
Ink supply Supplied from bottles (UV curing ink)
Ink capacity 1L (1 bottle for each color)
Usable media
Label stock (paper-based) / PVC sheet (including laminated; thickness no more than 
0.25 mm) / Fluorescent sheet / Reflective sheet
Margin
Leaf media
Left end and right end : 15 mm (Default) / Min. 5 mm   Front : 120 mm   Rear : 150 mm 
(Left end and right end : 0.6 in (Default) / Min. 0.2 in   Front : 4.7 in   Rear : 5.9 in)
Roll media
Left end and right end : 15 mm (Default) / Min. 5 mm   Front : 120 mm   Rear : 150 mm 
(Left end and right end : 0.6 in (Default) / Min. 0.2 in   Front : 4.7 in   Rear : 5.9 in)
Head height adjustment Manual 3-stage (2.0/2.5/3.0) 
Waste ink tank Bottle type (2,000 cc)
Command MRL- V
UV unit Two air-cooled LED UV irradiation units (mounted on the head slider)





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-3
1
2
2
2
2
2
7
Cutter Section Specifications
Item Specifications
Maximum speed 
*1
*1. The  maximum  speed  may  be  limited,  depending  on  the  size  of  a  used  medium.  In  addition,  the  cutting  section  does  not  operate  with  both  speed  and
acceleration being at the maximum.
30 cm/s (42 cm/s in the 45° direction) (118.1 in/s (165.4 in/s in the 45° direction))
Maximum acceleration 0.5G
Cutting pressure 10 to 450g (0.02 to 1.0lb)
Number of times the cutter responds 
to a medium
10 times/sec
Usable tools
Eccentric cutter/ water-based ballpoint pen/ oil-based ballpoint pen/ Ballpoint pen for 
handwriting (sold on the market) 
*2
*2. Use one with a diameter of 8 to 9 Φ whose clamped part has no protrusion or taper. In addition, because the position of the pen point changes, depending on
the types of pens, no good image quality can be ensured.
Usable media
Polyvinyl chloride sheet (Thickness of 0.25mm or less with laminate) /fluorescent 
sheet 
*3
 
*4
reflecting sheet 
*4
(excluding high-intensity reflecting sheets)/ Label card (paper-
based)/ Heat transfer rubber sheet (Polyvinyl chloride sheet (Thickness of 0.01in or 
less with laminate)/ fluorescent sheet / reflecting sheet 
*4
(excluding high-intensity 
reflecting sheets)/ Label card (paper-based)/ Heat transfer rubber sheet) 
*3. This conforms with our specified sheet. This conforms with our specified sheet.
*4. When  a  blade dedicated  for  fluorescent  sheets  (SPB-0007)  or  a  blade  dedicated  for  reflecting  sheets  (SPB-0006)  is  used.  When  a  blade  dedicated  for
fluorescent sheets (SPB-0007) or a blade dedicated for reflecting sheets (SPB-0006) is used.
Margin
Leaf media
Left and right: 15mm (0.6in) (default value), Minimum: 5mm (0.2in), Front: 135 mm 
(5.3in), Rear: 150 mm (5.9in)
Roll media
Left and right: 15mm (0.6in) (default value), Minimum: 5mm (0.2in), Front: 135 mm 
(5.3in), Rear: 150 mm (5.9in)
Repetition accuracy 
*5
*5. For repetition accuracy, see the lower part of this page.
± 0.2 mm or less (excluding expansion and contraction due to temperature)
Reception buffer memory 256 MB
Command MGL-II c2
Program step 25μm/step





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-4
Common Specifications
UCJV300 Series
Item UCJV300-160 UCJV300-130 UCJV300-107 UCJV300-75
Max. printing/ cutting width 1610mm (63.4in) 1361mm (53.6in) 1090mm (42.9in) 800mm (31.5in)
Roll media SIZE
Maximum 1620mm (63.8in) 1371mm (54.0in) 1100mm (43.3in) 810mm (31.9in)
Minimum 210mm (8.3in)
Thickness 1.0 mm or less (0.04 in or less) 
Roll outside diame-
ter 
*1
*1. It is outside diameter and weight after take-up media.
Paper media : Φ250 mm or less (Φ9.8 in or less) Other media : Φ210 mm or less 
(Φ8.3 in or less)
Roll weight  
*1,*2
*2. Without deflection of the roll when it is retained at both ends.
40 kg or less (88.2 lb or less)
Roll inside diameter 2 or 3 inches
Printing surface Inside/outside
Roll end treatment
The roll end is gently fixed to the core with weak-adhesive tape or weak glue for 
easy removal.
Leaf media SIZE
Maximum 1620mm (63.8in) 1371mm (54.0in) 1100mm (43.3in) 810mm (31.9in)
Minimum 210mm (8.3in)
Distance accuracy
Absolute accuracy
Whichever the larger one of ± 0.3 mm or ± 0.3 % of the designated (Whichever 
the larger one of ± 0.01 in or ± 0.3 % of the designated)
Reproducibility
Whichever the larger one of ± 0.2 mm or ± 0.1 % of the designated
(Whichever the larger one of ± 0.08in or ± 0.1 % of the designated)
Perpendicularity ± 0.5 mm / 1000 mm (± 0.02 in / 39.4 in)
Media delivery
Take-up device supplied as a standard accessory (switching possible between 
face in and face out).
Interface
Print data transfer 
function
USB 2.0, Ethernet 1000 BASE-T
E-mail function Ethernet 10 BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BA
Noise
During standby Less than 55 dB (A) (FAST-A, Front & Rear & Left & Right 1 m)
During continuous 
printing
Less than 65 dB (A)
During discontinu-
ous printing
Less than 70 dB (A)
Safety Standard
VCCI-Class A, FCC-Class A, UL 60950-1 compliant ETL, CE Marking (EMC,Low 
Voltage Directive,Machinery Directive, RoHS Directive), CB Report, RoHS, 
Energy Star, RCM
Power
Single-phase AC100 - 120V / 200 - 240V ±10%
50/60Hz ± 1Hz 
Power consumption [email protected] system / [email protected] system
Recommended 
Environment
Available temp. 20 °C to 30 °C (68 °F to 86 °F)
Humidity 35 to 65% Rh (No condensation)
Guaranteed temp.
20 °C to 25 ℃ (68 °F to 86 °F)
Temperature change ± 10 °C / h or less (± 50 °F / h or less)
Dust Equivalent to normal office level 
Highest operation 
height
2000 m (6561.7ft)
Weight 188kg (414.5lb) 177kg (390.2lb) 161kg (354.9lb) 144kg (317.5lb)
Outside dimensions
Width 2900mm (114.2in) 2650mm (104.3in) 2380mm (93.7in) 2090mm (82.3in)
Depth 776mm (30.6in)
Height 1475 mm (58.1in) (excluding ink bottle height)





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-5
1
2
2
2
2
2
7
UCJV150 Series
Item UCJV150-160
Max. printing/ cutting width 1610mm (63.4in)
Roll media SIZE
Maximum 1620mm (63.8in)
Minimum 210mm (8.3in)
Thickness 1.0 mm or less (0.04 in or less) 
Roll outside diame-
ter 
*1
*1. It is outside diameter and weight after take-up media.
Paper media : Φ250 mm or less (Φ9.8 in or less) Other media : Φ210 mm or less 
(Φ8.3 in or less)
Roll weight  
*1,*2
*2. Without deflection of the roll when it is retained at both ends.
40 kg or less (88.2 lb or less)
Roll inside diameter 2 or 3 inches
Printing surface Inside/outside
Roll end treatment
The roll end is gently fixed to the core with weak-adhesive tape or weak glue for 
easy removal.
Leaf media SIZE
Maximum 1620mm (63.8in)
Minimum 210mm (8.3in)
Distance accuracy
Absolute accuracy
Whichever the larger one of ± 0.3 mm or ± 0.3 % of the designated (Whichever 
the larger one of ± 0.01 in or ± 0.3 % of the designated)
Reproducibility
Whichever the larger one of ± 0.2 mm or ± 0.1 % of the designated
(Whichever the larger one of ± 0.08in or ± 0.1 % of the designated)
Perpendicularity ± 0.5 mm / 1000 mm (± 0.02 in / 39.4 in)
Media delivery
Take-up device supplied as a standard accessory (switching possible between 
face in and face out).
Interface
Print data transfer 
function
USB 2.0, Ethernet 1000 BASE-T
E-mail function Ethernet 10 BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BA
Noise
During standby Less than 55 dB (A) (FAST-A, Front & Rear & Left & Right 1 m)
During continuous 
printing
Less than 65 dB (A)
During discontinu-
ous printing
Less than 70 dB (A)
Safety Standard
VCCI-Class A, FCC-Class A, UL 60950-1 compliant ETL, CE Marking (EMC,Low 
Voltage Directive,Machinery Directive, RoHS Directive), CB Report, RoHS, 
Energy Star, RCM
Power
Single-phase AC100 - 120V / 200 - 240V ±10%
50/60Hz ± 1Hz 
Power consumption [email protected] system / [email protected] system
Recommended 
Environment
Available temp. 20 °C to 30 °C (68 °F to 86 °F)
Humidity 35 to 65% Rh (No condensation)
Guaranteed temp.
20 °C to 25 ℃ (68 °F to 86 °F)
Temperature change ± 10 °C / h or less (± 50 °F / h or less)
Dust Equivalent to normal office level 
Highest operation 
height
2000 m (6561.7ft)
Weight 183kg (403.4lb)
Outside dimensions
Width 2900mm (114.2in)
Depth 776mm (30.6in)
Height 1475 mm (58.1in) (excluding ink bottle height)





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-6
Ink specifications
Item UV ink
Supply 1 L ink bottle
Color
Black ink
Cyan ink
Magenta ink
Yellow ink
Light cyan ink
Light magenta ink
White ink
Clear ink
Ink capacity 1L
Shelf life
The period is printed on the ink bottle.
Within three months after opening the package even in the available period.
Storage temperature
Storage
5 to 30 ℃ (Up to 1 month at 30 ℃ )
• Be sure to keep a vessel in the airtight condition.
• Be sure to keep a vessel in a dry, well-ventilated, cool and dark location.
Transportation
1 to 60 ℃ (Up to 120 hours at 60 ℃ , up to 1 month at 40 ℃ )
• Avoid the condition lower than 0 °C and higher than 40 °C. (Avoid the condition
lower than 32 °F and higher than 104 °F.)
• Do not disassemble ink bottles and do not refill them with ink.
• Ink could freeze if kept in a cold place for an extended period.
If the ink freezes, defrost it for at least 3 hours at room temperature (25 ℃ ) before use.
Note that the properties of ink that has been frozen will change, resulting in deteriorated print quality. Store the ink in an 
environment that will not freeze the ink.





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-7
1
2
2
2
2
2
7
Ink bottle installation order
• The installation order of ink bottles varies depending on the ink set that you are using.

Model Ink Set
Installation Location
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UCJV150 Series 4C - - C M Y K - -
UCJV300 Series
4C CMYKYKMC
6C + W C M Y K Lm Lc W W
4C + CL + W C M Y K CL CL W W
4C + W C C M M Y K W W
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8





Chapter 7  Appendix  
7-8
Sheet for inquiry
Use this sheet for troubles and abnormal functions of the machine.
Fill in the following necessary items, and fax the sheet to our sales office.
Company name
Person in charge
Telephone number
Machine model
Operating system
Machine information
*1
*1. Refer to "Displaying the Information" of "Convenient using" then fill in necessary information. ( P.3-27)
Error message
Contents of inquiry





UCJV300Series/150Series Operation Manual
October, 2018
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2182-3 Shigeno-otsu, Tomi-shi, Nagano 389-0512 JAPAN
D203176-23-19102018





MK
FW : 2.20
© MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.2017





Ошибка 504 Gateway Time out – это код состояния HTTP, который означает, что один сервер не получил своевременный отклик от другого сервера, к которому он обратился, пытаясь загрузить веб-страницу или выполнить запрос браузера. Она может возникать вместе с 502 Bad Gateway.

Другими словами, ошибка 504 указывает на то, что у сервера, на котором расположен сайт и у компьютера, на котором выскакивает ошибка 504, отсутствует стабильное достаточно быстрое соединение с интернетом.

  • Как можно увидеть ошибку 504 Gateway Time out
  • Причины возникновения ошибки 504 Gateway Time out
  • Как исправить ошибку 504 Gateway Time out
  • Исправление ошибки 504 Gateway Time out на вашем собственном сайте
  • Больше способов увидеть ошибку 504 Gateway Time out
  • Ошибки похожие на 504 Gateway Time out

Отдельным сайтам разрешено настраивать отображение ошибки Gateway Timeout. Вот несколько распространенных способов вывода подобной ошибки:

504 Gateway Timeout
HTTP 504
504 ERROR
Gateway Timeout (504)
HTTP Error 504 - Gateway Timeout
Gateway Timeout Error

Ошибка 504 Gateway Time out появляется внутри окна браузера, как обычная веб-страница. На ней могут быть знакомые верхние и нижние колонтитулы сайта и красивое английское сообщение. Также подобная ошибка может отображаться на полностью белой странице с большой цифрой 504 вверху. Это одно и то же сообщение, независимо от того, как сайт показывает его вам.

Помните, что ошибка 504 Gateway Time out и 502 Bad Gateway nginx может появиться в любом браузере, операционной системе и на любом устройстве.

В большинстве случаев ошибка 504 Gateway Timeout означает, что любой сервер, который выдает «тайм-аут», «упал» или неправильно работает.

Поскольку эта ошибка обычно возникает между серверами в интернете, то, вероятно, она не связана с вашим компьютером, устройством или интернет-соединением.

Перезагрузите веб-страницу, нажав кнопку обновление / перезагрузка, в F5 или повторив URL-адрес из адресной строки.

Несмотря на то, что 504 Gateway Timeout и ошибка 502 Bad Gateway сообщает о неподконтрольной вам ошибке, проблема может быть временной. Просто перезагрузите страницу — это быстро и легко.

  • Перезапустите все сетевые устройства. Временные проблемы с модемом, маршрутизатором, коммутаторами или другим сетевым оборудованием могут вызывать ошибку 504 Gateway Timeout. Простой перезапуск этих устройств может помочь.

Подсказка: При том, что порядок выключения этих устройств не важен, порядок включения их наоборот очень важен.

  • Проверьте настройки прокси-сервера в своем браузере или приложении. Убедитесь, что они верны. Неправильные настройки прокси-сервера могут вызвать 504 ошибку.

Подсказка. Смотрите Proxy.org обновленный, проверенный список прокси-серверов, которые можно использовать.

Примечание. Большинство компьютеров не имеют настроек прокси-сервера, поэтому, если ваши настройки пусты, пропустите этот шаг.

  • Измените DNS-сервер. Возможно, ошибка 504 Gateway Timeout, которую вы видите, вызвана проблемой с DNS-сервером, который вы используете.

Примечание. DNS-сервер, используемый сейчас, вероятно, автоматически назначается вашим провайдером. К счастью, для использования доступны другие DNS-сервера, которые можно выбрать.

Подсказка. Если не все сетевые устройства получают ошибку HTTP 504 или 502 error Bad Gateway, но все они находятся в одной сети, изменение DNS-сервера не сработает. Если это похоже на вашу ситуацию, переходите к следующей идее.

  • Если изменений не произошло, обратитесь к сайту. Это единственное, что вы можете сделать. Велика вероятность, что администраторы сайта уже работают, чтобы исправить первопричину ошибки 504 Gateway Timeout.

На большинстве сайтов есть учетные записи социальных сетей, которые они используют для поддержки. А некоторые даже имеют номера телефонов и адреса электронной почты.

Подсказка. Если начинает казаться, что сайт выдает 504 ошибку для всех, поищите в Twitter в режиме реального времени информацию о недоступности сайта. Лучший способ сделать это — найти #websitedown в Twitter. Например, если Facebook может быть недоступен, выполните поиск по тегу #facebookdown.

  • Обратитесь к своему интернет-провайдеру. Вероятнее всего, что после описанного выше устранения неполадок, выскакивающая 504 Gateway Timeout — это проблема, вызванная неполадками в Сети, за которую отвечает ваш провайдер.
  • Вернуться позже. На данный момент вы исчерпали все варианты, и ошибка 504 Gateway Timeout устраняется администратором сайта или интернет-провайдером.

Регулярно проверяйте сайт. Без сомнения, он снова начнет работать.

В большинстве случаев это происходит не по вашей вине, но и не по вине пользователей вашего ресурса. Начните с проверки того, что сервер может правильно предоставлять доступ ко всем доменам, к которым требуют доступ ваши приложения.

Большие объемы трафика могут привести к тому, что ваш сервер будет выдавать ошибку 504. Хотя 503 или ошибка 502 Bad Gateway будет более вероятна.

В частности, в WordPress сообщение 504: Gateway Timeout иногда возникает из-за поврежденных баз данных. Установите WP-DBManager и попробуйте применить функцию «Восстановить БД», а затем «Оптимизировать БД». Посмотрите, поможет ли это.

Убедитесь, что ваш файл HTACCESS правильный. Особенно если вы только что переустановили WordPress.

Свяжитесь с технической поддержкой хостинга. Возможно, ошибка 504, возвращаемая вашим сайтом, связана с проблемой на их стороне, которую они должны решить.

Ошибка Gateway Timeout при получении в Windows Update генерирует код ошибки 0x80244023 или сообщение WU_E_PT_HTTP_STATUS_GATEWAY_TIMEOUT.

В программах на базе Windows, которые изначально обращаются к интернету, ошибка 504 может отображаться в небольшом диалоговом окне или окне с ошибкой HTTP_STATUS_GATEWAY_TIMEOUT и/или сообщение The request was timed out waiting for a gateway (истекло время ожидания запроса для шлюза).

Менее распространенная ошибка 504 — это Gateway Time-out: The proxy server did not receive a timely response from the upstream server (прокси-сервер не получил своевременного ответа от вышестоящего сервера), но поиск и устранение неисправностей (указанных выше) продолжается.

Ряд сообщений об ошибках аналогичен ошибке 504 Gateway Timeout, поскольку все они происходят на стороне сервера. Некоторые включают в себя ошибку 500 Internal ServerВнутренняя ошибка сервера»), ошибку 502 Bad Gateway (что это означает — «Неверный шлюз»), и ошибку 503 Service UnavailableСервис временно недоступен»), среди нескольких других.

Существуют также коды статуса HTTP, которые не являются серверными, а возникают на клиентской стороне. Например, часто встречающаяся ошибка 404 Not FoundСтраница не найдена»).

Проблемы, при которых на дисплее появляются сообщения об ошибке

Если в работе устройства возникают проблемы, то раздается звуковой сигнал, и на дисплее появляется соответствующее сообщение об ошибке.

Выполните необходимые корректирующие действия в соответствии с сообщением на дисплее.

Ошибки, сопровождающиеся предупредительными сигналами

Эти ошибки обычно имеют отношение к элементам устройства, которые связаны с чернилами.

Сообщения об ошибках

В сообщениях об ошибках указан номер ошибки. Если на дисплее появилось какое-либо сообщение об ошибке, отключите питание устройства и затем через некоторое время включите его снова. Если на дисплее вновь появится такое же сообщение, свяжитесь с местным дистрибьютором MIMAKI или обратитесь за помощью непосредственно в сервисную службу компании MIMAKI.

Сообщение об ошибке


Отключите на некоторое время питание устройство, затем включите его снова. При появлении на дисплее того же сообщения, обратитесь к местному дистрибьютору за сервисной помощью.


Приложение

В приложении описаны спецификации и детали устройства, а также структура меню функций.

Содержание

Приложение

ОСНОВНЫЕ спецификации

СПЕЦИФИКАЦИИ ЧЕРНИЛ

РАЗМЕЩЕНИЕ предупредительных НАДПИСЕЙ

Структура меню функций……………………………………………………..

ОСНОВНЫЕ спецификации

Наименование JV3-160SP
Печатающая головка Метод Пьезоэлектрическая печатающая головка «c каплей по запросу»
Спецификация 4 линейные головки
Дозатор 360 дозаторов для каждого цвета
Разрешение 360, 540, 720, 1440 точек на дюйм (т/д)
Режим печати Набор из 4-х цветов 360 x 360 т/д: 1 / 2 / 4 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
360 x 720 т/д: 2 / 4 / 8 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
720 x 720 т/д: 2 / 4 / 8 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
720 x 1440 т/д: 4 / 8 / 16 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
1440 x 1440 т/д: 8 / 16 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
Набор из 6-х цветов 360 x 360 т/д: 2 / 4 / 8 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
360 x 540 т/д: 3 / 6 / 12 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
360 x 720 т/д: 4 / 8 / 16 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
720 x 720 т/д: 4 / 8 / 16 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
720 x 1440 т/д: 8 / 16 / 32 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
1440 x 1440 т/д: 16 / 32 проходов, в одном/ двух направлениях
Используемые чернила Набор из 4-х цветов 4 цвета (черный, циан, маджента, желтый) по два цвета на 1 картридж для каждого цвета
Набор из 6-х цветов 6 цветов сольвентных чернил (черный, циан, маджента, желтый, светлый циан, светлая маджента), по одному каждого цвета, и 2 картриджа очистительной жидкости для 1 картриджа каждого цвета
Емкость чернильного картриджа 4-цветный набор: каждый цвет (220 cc  5 cc для каждого картриджа) x 2

6-цветный набор: каждый цвет (220 cc  5 cc для каждого картриджа) x 1

Около 200 cc для каждого картриджа, изменяемая

Тип материала для печати Баннер, FF, ПВХ
Макс. ширина печати 1440 x 1440 т/д: 1610 мм (для 4 цветов), 1000 мм (для 6 цветов)
При нормальном сканировании 1610 мм
Высокоскоростное сканирование 1570 мм
Размеры рулонного материала (макс.) 1620 мм
(мин.) 210 мм
толщина 1.0 мм или менее (< 1, 0 мм)
внешний диаметр рулона  180 мм или менее (<  180 мм)
вес рулона 25 Кг или менее (<25 кг)
внутренний диаметр рулона 2 дюйма, 3 дюйма
поверхность печати Лицом наружу
крепление конца рулона используется легкая клеящаяся лента для облегчения снятия бумаги с сердечника
Размеры листового материала (макс.) 1620 мм
(мин.) 210 мм
Поля листовой материал правый и левый край: 15 мм
спереди: 65 мм
сзади: 110 мм
Поля рулонный материал правый и левый край: 15 мм
спереди: 25 мм
сзади: 0 мм
Точность размера абсолютная точка Любая наибольшая из  0.3 мм или  0.3 % от назначенной
воспроизводимость Любая наибольшая из of  0.2 мм или  0.1 % от назначенной
Перпендикулярный  0.5 мм / 1000 мм
Отклонение материала 5 мм или меньше / 10 м изменяемая (< 5 мм / 10 м)
Регулировка высоты головки 2.0 мм / 3 мм изменяемая, от поверхности рабочего печатного стола
Обрезка материала Обрезка по оси Y при помощи резака на блоке головок,

точность отрезания (шаги): 0.5 мм или менее.

Подача материала Стандартное подающее устройство (закрутка внутрь / наружу, на выбор)
Емкость для отхода чернил Бутылочный тип (2,000 cc [1pcs.])

Необходимость замены определяется визуально.

Интерфейс Совместим с IEEE1394 и с IEEE1284.
Команда MRL-II (база ESC/PV.2, MIMAKI)
Рабочий шум в режиме ожидания: менее 58 dB (FAST-A, измерено на расстоянии 1 м со всех сторон)

при непрерывной печати: менее 65 dB

при прерывании печати: менее 70 dB

Стандарт безопасности UL, VCCI-classA, FCC-classA, CEmarking, CBreport
Питание AC 100 — 120 V± 10%, AC 220 — 240 V± 10%, 50/60 Hz ± 1 Hz
Поглощение энергии 1.5 KVA

или менее

рекомендованные условия окружающей среды допустимая температура От 20º С до 35º C
влажность 35 to 65 % относительной влажности (без конденсации)
гарантированная температура От 20º С до 25º C
колебания температуры ± 10 º C / в час или менее
пыль Условия обычного офисного уровня
Вес основной блок 185 кг (без переднего вытяжного блока: 175 кг или менее)
габариты ширина 2660 мм
глубина Менее 750 мм
высота Менее 1240 мм

СПЕЦИФИКАЦИИ ЧЕРНИЛ

Наименование Спецификация
Цвет Картридж с чернилами черного цвета
Картридж с чернилами цвета циан
Картридж с чернилами цвета маджента
Картридж с чернилами желтого цвета
Картридж с чернилами цвета светлый циан
Картридж с чернилами цвета светлая маджента
емкость картриджа с чернилами 220 cc для каждого картриджа
срок хранения Один год с даты производства (при комнатной температуре)
В течение 3 месяцев после открытия упаковки
t хранения -30 to 40º C

(Хранение при t = 40ºC не более месяца)

-30 to 60ºC

(Хранение при t = 60ºC не более 120 часов, а при t = 40ºC — не более одного месяца)

РАЗМЕЩЕНИЕ предупредительныХ НАДПИСЕЙ

На устройстве приклеены этикетки с предупредительными надписями. Убедитесь в том, что Вы правильно понимаете все, что на них написано. Если хотя бы одна из надписей загрязнится до такой степени, что понять написанное будет невозможно, или если надпись отклеится, приобретите новую у своего местного дистрибьютора или в офисе MIMAKI.
Лицевая сторона

З
адняя сторона

Структура меню функций

© MIMAKI ENGINEERING Co., Ltd. 2004

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Error 503 роблокс
  • Error 503 unknown method
  • Error 503 site temporarily unavailable modx после переноса
  • Error 503 site temporarily unavailable modx revo
  • Error 503 sans